FCC ID: OSB-BRU3902 BRU3902 Mobitex Base Station

 

Introduction and Product Specification Contents 1 General ........................................................................................................ 3 1.1 Description ....................................................................................... 4 2 About this Manual ....................................................................................... 6 3 Using this Manual........................................................................................ 7 3.1 Safety Instructions............................................................................ 7 3.2 Site Requirements ............................................................................ 7 3.3 Installation........................................................................................ 7 3.4 Commissioning Procedure ............................................................... 8 3.5 FBTEST Reference Manual............................................................. 8 3.6 Operation and Maintenance ............................................................. 8 3.7 Functional Description ..................................................................... 9 3.8 Telephone Modem Settings.............................................................. 9 4 Technical Data........................................................................................... 10 4.1 Power Requirements and Dimensions ........................................... 10 4.2 Radio Parameters ........................................................................... 11 4.3 Battery ............................................................................................ 12 4.3.1 Battery Operation................................................................ 12 4.4 Environmental Classifications ....................................................... 12 4.5 Electromagnetic Compliance and Radio Standards ....................... 14 4.6 Electrical Safety ............................................................................. 14 4.7 Surge Immunity.............................................................................. 15 BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1551-EN/LZB 139 05 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-11 BRU3 MANUAL The contents of this document are subject to revision without notice due to continued progress in methodology, design and manufacturing. Ericsson shall have no liability for any errors or damages of any kind resulting from the use of this document. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1551-EN/LZB 139 05 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-11 INTRODUCTION 3 (16) 1 General Radio Base Unit 3 (BRU3) is a complete one-channel compact radio base station which uses 8 kbps data signalling and is designed for the 400, 800 and 900 MHz band. The BRU3, which may be installed outdoors and indoors, is a link between the mobile terminals (MOB) and the area exchanges (MOX) in the Mobitex Network. Figure 1 The front of Base Radio Unit 3 (BRU3). BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1551-EN/LZB 139 05 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-11 4 (16) BRU3 MANUAL 1.1 Description The BRU3 consists of two main mechanical parts:

FE Case Bottom Frame FE Case Top Frame The FBF comprises:

Weather-protected throughputs for the cabling FE Connection Board FE Power Supply Unit FE Battery Unit, for power supply backup FE Adaptation Board FBF FTF

(1)

(5) FNB

(11) FPU FBU FAB

(2)

(3)

(4) The FTF is hinged to the bottom part and works as a cover as well as a cooling flange, thus offering good thermal management for the BRU3. The FTF comprises:

FE Computer Board FE Modem Board FE Radio Board FE Filter Module FE Heating Unit FCB FMB FRB

(6)

(7)

(8) FFM (9) FHU

(10) BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1551-EN/LZB 139 05 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-11 INTRODUCTION 5 (16) Figure 2 Base Radio Unit 3 (BRU3). BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1551-EN/LZB 139 05 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-11 6 (16) BRU3 MANUAL 2 About this Manual The BRU3 Manual, is designed for engineering personnel who are familiar with data communications terminology and protocols and who will work on site with the BRU3. The Manual is intended for:

Operation and Maintenance personnel Installation and Commissioning personnel

System engineers

Training BRU3 units may be damaged by mismanagement. Therefore, read the documents included in this manual carefully before you start operating the BRU3, especially the Safety Instructions section. It is important that this manual be available to all personnel working with the BRU3, and that the BRU3 is operated only by trained personnel. The manual provides the necessary information for installation, commissioning and operation of the BRU3. It is divided into four main parts:

BRU3 - Installation module BRU3 - General module (including the Commissioning Procedure section) BRU3 - Operation and Maintenance module BRU3 - Functional Description module The following sections are also included in the BRU3 - General module:

Safety Instructions Site Requirements FBTEST Reference Manual - complementary to the Commissioning Procedure section. Telephone Modem Settings - complementary to the modem operation information in the Operation and Maintenance module. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1551-EN/LZB 139 05 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-11

INTRODUCTION 7 (16) 3 Using this Manual Before using this manual, you should have an overall understanding of how the Mobitex system operates as a wide-area packet switching network. If not, first refer to the System Manual. 3.1 Safety Instructions This section contains safety instructions for handling the BRU3 during installation and maintenance. Please read the Safety Instructions section before reading the other sections or starting any kind of installation or maintenance work. 3.2 Site Requirements This section covers the site preparations required, in terms of space, power, environment, cables, grounding, etc., before installing the BRU3. Normally, this kind of document is not included in hardware documentation but has been included in this manual as a complement to the Installation Instructions in the BRU3 - Installation module. 3.3 Installation This module contains the information required for a safe installation of the BRU3. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1551-EN/LZB 139 05 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-11 8 (16) BRU3 MANUAL 3.4 Commissioning Procedure This section includes two parts, the hardware and the software commissioning procedures. Hardware Commissioning describes how to put the BRU3 into operation after installation has been completed. Software Commissioning gives the necessary information for the commissioning of the BRU3 software. 3.5 FBTEST Reference Manual This section includes the reference manual for the FBTEST test program which is used for the BRU3 hardware commissioning and some maintenance operations. 3.6 Operation and Maintenance This module informs about first-line operation and maintenance of the BRU3, i.e. actions at site. The Design, Function and Operation part describes the design, function and operation of the BRU3 and its constituent parts. The Maintenance part describes how to carry out visual and preventive maintenance on the BRU3. The Troubleshooting part describes how to act if problems occur when operating the BRU3. Trouble shooting is always carried out in agreement with the NCC operator personnel. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1551-EN/LZB 139 05 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-11 INTRODUCTION 9 (16) 3.7 Functional Description This module describes the functions of the BRU3. To understand the sections dealing with radio equipment, the reader must have a knowledge of radio frequency practice. The BRU3 in the Mobitex Network and the Logic and Radio System sections provide a functional description of the BRU3 and the associated mobile terminal interface. The level of detail has been chosen to provide suitably qualified readers with a logical understanding of how the BRU3 functions as a system, together with a clear appreciation of the functional role of each board. The Mechanical Design section describes the BRU3 hardware in practical engineering terms. The information provided should enable engineering personnel to trouble-shoot in a logical and systematic manner, and repair the system down to module replacement level. 3.8 Telephone Modem Settings This section can be used as a quick reference guide when configuring the BRU3 telephone modem. The configuration is done using the FBTEST Reference Manual. For further information about the telephone modem, please refer to the Modem Configuration section in System User Guides. Note!

The information regarding telephone modem in this manual may not be applicable to all BRU3 variants. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1551-EN/LZB 139 05 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-11 10 (16) BRU3 MANUAL 4 Technical Data 4.1 Power Requirements and Dimensions Power Requirements Title Product No. Rated Voltage

(V AC) Operation Voltage

(V AC) Rated Current

(A rms) Nominal Power Freq.

(Hz) Consumption

(W) 39xx BRU3 39xx-D/T HRB 104 43/Cn 110 - 130 or 220 - 240 90 - 140 or 198 - 254 38xx BRU3 38xx-D/T HRB 104 43/Cn 220 - 240 198 - 254 34xx BRU3 34xx-D/T HRB 104 43/Bn 220 - 240 198 - 254 3 3 9 50/60

<500 50 50

<500

<900 Dimension Height (mm) Width (mm) Depth (mm) Weight (kg) 39xx 38xx 34xx 345 345 345 472 472 472 202 202 202 18 18 19 BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1551-EN/LZB 139 05 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-11 INTRODUCTION 11 (16) 4.2 Radio Parameters Radio data transmission speed

= 8 kbps Modulation Deviation Traffic mode Channel bandwidth Sensitivity Antenna impedance Blocking ratio Cx Cy Bn Bx By Bz Bm Bw Bv Bq

= Modified GMSK, BT = 0.3

= 2.0 kHz

= Duplex

= 12.5 kHz

= -117 dBm at 1% BER

= 50 ohm

= Better than 90 dB

= C2, C4 - C8

= C20, C23

= B3, B6 - B9, B20, B21

= B10 - B13, B18, B19, B32, B33

= B14, B15

= B16, B17

= B24, B25

= B40, B41

= B46, B47

= B22, B23 Product No. Frequency Range (MHz) Duplex Spacing (MHz) Frequency Stability

(ppm) Antenna Output Power 39xx HRB 104 43/Cx TX: 935.0125 - 940.9875 RX: 896.0125 - 901.9875 38xx HRB 104 43/Cy TX 819.0000 - 825.0000 RX 864.0000 - 870.0000 34xx HRB 104 43/Bn TX: 426.6000 - 429.5000 RX: 416.6000 - 419.5000 HRB 104 43/Bx TX: 423.9000 - 426.6000 RX: 413.9000 - 416.6000 39 45 10 10 HRB 104 43/By TX: 440.0000 - 440.6000 RX: 425.5000 - 426.1000 14.5 HRB 104 43/Bz TX: 453.1000 - 453.4000 RX: 459.6000 - 459.9000 HRB 104 43/Bm TX: 415.7000 - 418.0000 RX: 406.2000 - 408.5000 HRB 104 43/Bw TX: 421.0000 - 423.9000 RX: 411.0000 - 413.9000 HRB 104 43/Bv TX: 419.5000 - 420.5000 RX: 412.5000 - 413.5000 HRB 104 43/Bq TX: 421.2500 - 421.7500 RX: 428.2500 - 428.7500 6.5 9.5 10 7 7

+/- 0.1

+/- 0.1

+/- 0.2

+/- 0.2

+/- 0.2

+/- 0.2

+/- 0.2

+/- 0.2

+/- 0.2

+/- 0.2 3 W (Duplex Filter) 3 W (TXBP Filter) 6 W (Duplex Filter) 6 W (TXBP Filter) 6 W (Duplex Filter) 6 W (TXBP Filter) 6 W (Duplex Filter) 6 W (TXBP Filter) 6 W (Duplex Filter) 6 W (TXBP Filter) 6 W (Duplex Filter) 6 W (TXBP Filter) 6 W (Duplex Filter) 6 W (TXBP Filter) 6 W (Duplex Filter) 6 W (TXBP Filter) 6 W (Duplex Filter) 6 W (TXBP Filter) 6 W (Duplex Filter) 6 W (TXBP Filter) BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1551-EN/LZB 139 05 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-11 12 (16) BRU3 MANUAL 4.3 Battery Battery Operation 4.3.1 Battery discharge: Ambient temperature within 0 C to +55 C. Product No. Battery Discharge [min]

39xx HRB 104 43/Cn

> 30 @ 3 W output power

> 30 @ 6 W output power 38xx HRB 104 43/Cn

> 15 @ 6 W output power 34xx HRB 104 43/Bn

> 15 @ 6 W output power 4.4 Environmental Classifications Water resistance:

Europe:

class IP 43 according to IEC 529 US:

class 3R according to UL 50 Weather Protected Locations:

ETS 300 019-1-3: Environmental Class 3.3, with extended temperature range for 34xx. 39xx:

38xx:

34xx:

-25 C to +60 C

-25 C to +60 C

-33 C to +60 C BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1551-EN/LZB 139 05 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-11 INTRODUCTION 13 (16) Non-Weather Protected Locations:

ETS 300 019-1-4: Environmental Class 4.1, with extended temperature range for 34xx. 39xx:

-25 C to +40 C 38xx:

-25 C to +40 C 34xx:

-33 C to +40 C Humidity:

10 - 100%

Storage:

-40 C to +60 C ETS 300 019-1-1: Class 1.3 for storage. Transport:

ETS 300 019-1-2: Class 2.3 for public transportation when packed in Ericsson supplied packaging material or equivalent. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1551-EN/LZB 139 05 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-11 14 (16) 4.5 BRU3 MANUAL Electromagnetic Compliance and Radio Standards 34xx: ETS 300 279 ETS 300 113 (according to EU Directive 1999/5/EC) CE marked 38xx: ETS 300 279 ETS 300 113 (according to EU Directive 1999/5/EC) CE marked 39xx: UL1950, UL listed CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 950-95 FCC part 68, FCC part 90 4.6 Electrical Safety 34xx:

IEC 950:1991 with Amendments No. 1:1992 and 2:1993 in accordance with the EC Low Voltage Directive AS/NZS3260 1992 (Australia/New Zealand) 38xx:

IEC 60 950 39xx: CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 950-M89 and UL50, Tenth Edition, Type 3R Enclosures BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1551-EN/LZB 139 05 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-11 INTRODUCTION 15 (16) 4.7 Surge Immunity Antenna input: 4 kV, according to ENV 50142. Power input:

Line - neutral 4 kV Line/neutral - protection ground 2 kV according to IEC 801-5 422 input:

2 kV, according to IEC 801-5 232 input:

2 kV, according to IEC 801-5 Tel input:

2 kV, according to CCITT 17 Alarm input:

2 kV, according to CCITT 17 BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1551-EN/LZB 139 05 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-11 16 (16) BRU3 MANUAL BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1551-EN/LZB 139 05 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-11

 

 

Installation Kit 1 Standard Installation Kit (provided by Ericsson) ........................................ 3 2 Pole Installation Kit (provided by Ericsson) ............................................... 4 Contents BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1/1531-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev E, 2001-09-28 BRU3 MANUAL The contents of this document are subject to revision without notice due to continued progress in methodology, design and manufacturing. Ericsson shall have no liability for any errors or damages of any kind resulting from the use of this document. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1/1531-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev E, 2001-09-28 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 3 (4) 1 Standard Installation Kit (provided by Ericsson) The Standard Installation Kit comprises all the parts needed to install a BRU3 on a wall (except for the Installation Material). The following parts are included in the kit:

1 pc of the BRU3 with all included parts installed. 1 pc of the FE Installation Kit (FIK), NTMA 102 22/1 including:

1 pc of Base Plate, SXAA 138 0451 2 pcs of M10x20mm Hook Up Bolts, SXAA 138 0458 (for installation of the BRU3 to the Base Plate) 2 pcs of TX and RX Antenna Connectors, RPTA 309 28/1 (11 TNC-50-

7-5c Suhner), for Antenna Cable RG 214/U60) 2 pcs of Sleeves, RPYA 076 0002/1 (73Z-0-0-180 Suhner), for Antenna Connector RPTA 309 28/1 3 pcs of Cable Bushings, NDMA 071 01/01 (Small) 3 pcs of Cable Bushing Nuts, SBSA 071 01/01 (Small) 2 pcs of Cable Bushings, NDMA 071 01/02 (Large) 3 pcs of Cable Bushing Nuts, SBSA 071 01/02 (Large) 1 pc of M8x10mm Grounding Bolt, SXA 126 0001 1 pc of Spring Washer M8, SCL 203 05 1 pc of Plain Washer M8, SCA 103 080 1 pc of FE Console Cable, TSRA 902 0190 1 pc of FE Power Connection Kit 38xx and 39xx: NTM 201 1126/1 34xx: NTM 201 1127/1 1 pc of the following three connection cables:

- FE Telephone Line Connection Cable, TSRA 905 45

- FE Modem Connection Cable RS232, TSRA 904 63

- FE Modem Connection Cable RS422, TSRA 904 64 1 pc of FE Alarm Cable, TSRA 905 44. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1/1531-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev E, 2001-09-28

4 (4) 2 BRU3 MANUAL Pole Installation Kit (provided by Ericsson) Together with the Standard Installation Kit, the following Pole Installation Kit is needed to mount the BRU3 on a horizontal or vertical pole with a diameter of 15-100 mm:

1 pc of FE Mounting Bracket 100, NTMA 102 23/1. The Pole Installation Kit comprises:

2 pc of Braces, SXAA 138 0453 4 pcs of M10x200mm Bolts, SXAA 138 0449 10 pcs of M10 Nuts, SBM 149 100 (10 pcs used for a vertical pole, 8 pcs used for a horizontal pole) 2 pcs of M10x25mm Bolts, SBA 192 100/0250 (only used for installation on a vertical pole) 2 pcs of M10 Washers, SCL 203 06 (only used for installation on a vertical pole). BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1/1531-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev E, 2001-09-28

 

 

OM Instructions Contents 1 Design, Function and Operation.................................................................. 3 1.1 General ............................................................................................. 3 1.2 Mechanical Parts .............................................................................. 4 1.3 Start-Up and Shutdown Procedures ................................................. 8 Start-Up Procedure ............................................................... 8 1.3.1 1.3.2 Shutdown Procedure ............................................................. 8 1.3.3 Restarting the BRU3 (Warm Start)....................................... 9 1.3.4 Manual Restart of the BRU3 ................................................ 9 1.3.5 Manual Restart of a BRU3 in Stand Alone Mode .............. 10 1.4 Network Connections..................................................................... 12 1.4.1 General................................................................................ 12 1.4.2 Telephone Modem Boards.................................................. 13 1.5 Logic Units..................................................................................... 17 1.5.1 General................................................................................ 17 1.5.2 Connections ........................................................................ 17 1.5.3 LEDs ................................................................................... 18 1.5.4 Reset Button........................................................................ 18 1.6 Radio Units..................................................................................... 19 1.6.1 General................................................................................ 19 1.6.2 Radio Operation.................................................................. 21 1.6.3 Reset.................................................................................... 21 1.6.4 Connectors .......................................................................... 21 1.7 Power Supply ................................................................................. 22 1.7.1 General................................................................................ 22 FE Power Supply Unit (FPU) ............................................. 23 1.7.2 1.7.3 FE Battery Unit (FBU) ....................................................... 26 FE Heating Unit (FHU) ...................................................... 27 1.7.4 1.8 Alarms ............................................................................................ 28 2 Maintenance .............................................................................................. 29 2.1 General ........................................................................................... 29 2.2 Equipment Required....................................................................... 30 BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10 BRU3 MANUAL 2.3 Documentation Required ................................................................30 2.4 Maintenance to be Performed .........................................................31 2.4.1 Visual and Preventive Maintenance ....................................31 2.4.2 Battery Test .........................................................................33 2.5 Function Check ...............................................................................34 2.5.1 General ................................................................................34 2.5.2 Equipment Required ............................................................34 2.5.3 Check of Internal Power Supply (Mains and Battery) ........35 2.5.4 FBTEST Board Test ............................................................37 2.5.5 Channel Unit Output Power ................................................38 2.5.6 Transmitter Deviation..........................................................41 2.5.7 Bit Errors at high Signal Levels ..........................................42 2.5.8 Receiver Sensitivity.............................................................44 2.5.9 Receiver Sensitivity at Frequency Deviation ......................46 2.5.10 Antenna input Signal ...........................................................48 2.5.11 Transmitter Antenna VSWR ...............................................49 2.5.12 Hardware Alarm Status .......................................................52 3.2.1 3.2.2 3 Troubleshooting .........................................................................................54 3.1 General............................................................................................54 3.2 Power Supply Units ........................................................................55 FE Power Supply Unit (FPU)..............................................55 FE Battery Unit (FBU) ........................................................56 3.3 Logic and modem units...................................................................57 FE Computer Board (FCB) .................................................57 FE Modem Board (FMB) & FE Adaptation Board (FAB) .58 FE Connection Board (FNB)...............................................58 3.4 Radio units ......................................................................................59 FE Radio Board (FRB)........................................................59 3.5 FE Heating Unit (FHU) ..................................................................59 FE Heating Board (FHB).....................................................59 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.4.1 3.5.1 The contents of this document are subject to revision without notice due to continued progress in methodology, design and manufacturing. Ericsson shall have no liability for any errors or damages of any kind resulting from the use of this document. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE, MODULE B1 3 (60) 1 Design, Function and Operation 1.1 General Figure 1 BRU3 (exterior). This section describes the design, function and operation of the Mobitex Base Radio Unit 3 (BRU3). During normal operation, all actions necessary for the operation and check of the BRU3 are carried out at the Network Control Centre (NCC). When operating the BRU3 on site, the following equipment is required:

Portable PC including VT-100 emulation software.

FE Console Cable TSRA 902 0190 for connection of the terminal to the BRU3 connector "P1-CONSOLE".

FBTEST BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10 4 (60) BRU3 MANUAL For a description on how to connect the portable PC to the BRU3, please refer to Shutdown Procedure in the Start-Up and Shutdown Procedures section below. BRU3 is a complete one-channel compact radio base station which uses 8 kbps data signalling and is designed for the 400, 800 or 900 MHz band. The BRU3, which may be installed both outdoors and indoors, is a link between the mobile terminals (MOB) and the area exchanges (MOX) in the MOBITEX Network. 1.2 Mechanical Parts The BRU3 consists of two main mechanical parts, the FE Case Bottom Frame

(FBF) and FE Case Top Frame (FTF). The FBF is fixed on site. This part has weather-protected throughputs for the cabling, the FE Connection Board (FNB), the FE Power Supply Unit (FPU) and the FE Battery Unit (FBU) for power supply backup. The other part, the FTF, is hinged to the bottom part and works as a cover and cooling flange, offering good thermal management for the BRU3. The FTF includes the FE Computer Board (FCB), the FE Modem Board (FMB), the FE Radio Board (FRB), the FE Filter Module (FFM) and the FE Heating Unit

(FHU). The BRU3 is lockable to prevent unauthorized access to the unit. To avoid corrosion, the painted white mechanical parts are made of corrosion-resistant material. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE, MODULE B1 5 (60) Figure 2 BRU3 (interior). 1 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. FE Case Bottom Frame (FBF) FE Power Supply Unit (FPU) FE Battery Unit (FBU) FE Adaptation Board (FAB) FE Case Top Frame (FTF) FE Computer Board (FCB) FE Modem Board (FMB) FE Radio Board (FRB) FE Filter Module (FFM) FE Heating Unit (FHU) FE Connection Board (FNB) BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10 6 (60) BRU3 MANUAL Figure 3 BRU3 external connections. 1. RX Antenna 2. TX Antenna 3. Power Connection 4. Telephone Line Connection 5. Modem Connection RS422C 6. Modem Connection RS232C 7. 8. Alarm Connection Console Connection BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE, MODULE B1 7 (60) Pos 2 is used as the antenna connection when a combined RX/TX antenna is used. The table below gives a brief description of the BRU3 connections used. The position numbers found in the Position column refer to the corresponding position numbers in Figure 3. Pos. Connector Type of Connector Connection To/From 3 1 2 4 5 6 7 8 MAINS INLET IEC 120/230V AC input from the BRU3 site power supply. RX ANT. TNC Signals from the receiving antenna (RX). TX ANT. ALT. RX/TX ANT. TNC Signals to the transmitting antenna TX. Signals to/from the combined RX/TX antenna. P3-TELEPHONE 9p d-sub Telephone line connection. P5-RS422B 25p d-sub Connection to MOX via balanced serial interface RS422B. P4-RS232C 25p d-sub Connection to MOX via un-balanced serial interface RS232C P2-ALARM 9p d-sub Connection used for external alarm. Defined by the operator. P1-CONSOLE 9p d-sub Connection used for Console/ NODOP terminal. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10 8 (60) BRU3 MANUAL 1.3 Start-Up and Shutdown Procedures Note!

When starting up the BRU3 after installation, follow the instructions under Hardware Commissioning Procedure and Software Commissioning Procedure in the Commissioning Procedure section of the BRU3 - General module. 1.3.1 Start-Up Procedure When starting up the BRU3, do as follows:

1. 2. 3. 4. Set the "MAINS SWITCH" located on the FE Power Supply Unit (FPU) to position "1". Set the "BATTERY SWITCH" located on the FPU to position "1". Check that the yellow status LEDs are lit on the FE Computer Board

(FCB) and the FPU. Check, after a few seconds, that no red alarm LEDs are lit on the FCB or FPU. Note!

The warm-up time for the BRU3 is required to be at least 30 minutes, before the transmitter is activated. Specifications for the BRU3 are valid after this period. 1.3.2 Shutdown Procedure To ensure minimal traffic and data loss when the power to the node has to be shut down, always perform the following shutdown procedure:

1. Connect the portable PC via the FE Console Cable TSRA 902 0190 to the port "P1-CONSOLE" on the FE Connection Board (FNB). 2. Press return to get the NODOP prompt NODOP>

Note!

If the node has just started, it will take a little while before NODOP is functioning. 3. Give the command HALT 120 on the NODOP terminal. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE, MODULE B1 9 (60) 4. When you are asked to verify the command, enter Y. 5. The shutdown procedure will stop all incoming traffic and close all open files. A message will be displayed on the console terminal when the node may be switched off. 1.3.3 Restarting the BRU3 (Warm Start) Restart (RESET) can be performed either of the entire node or of certain units.

By command from an NCC operator.

By the NODOP command BOOT using a terminal.

Manually for different units.

Automatically, by the software for the different units. 1.3.4 Manual Restart of the BRU3 The manual restart procedure below should be used only if NODOP does not respond to any command. Otherwise, use the NODOP BOOT command. Pressing the reset button will cause an immediate restart of the BRU3, without ensuring a proper node shutdown. The restart may result in loss of user traffic and data. The reset button (SW1) is located on the FE Computer Board (FCB). After the restart, the BRU3 will be reinitiated, implying logical connection of all serial communication. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10 10 (60) BRU3 MANUAL 1.3.5 Manual Restart of a BRU3 in Stand Alone Mode This is short description on how to boot the BRU3 using a PC and a terminal program. When the connection is up and running (use 19200 bps 8N1), cold start the BRU3 by switching the power on and off. After a short while, some text will be displayed on the terminal. Steps 1-7 below describe how to download software from the PC to the BRU3. These steps are required only if no main software is present on the BRU3 disks. To check if the main software is present on the disks, use the command DI. Check if there is a .mfe (like the one stated in step 6) file on either of the disks wp1:, wp2:, wp3:, etc. The name for the disks (wp1, etc.) that are present can be seen at the start-up. Note!

Do not forget the colon : after the disk name. File names stated in the instruction are only examples of file names and should be replaced by correct names. 1. On request, enter !!! and set the thumb wheel in position 7 for the command prompt (CMD>). Type ASY at the CMD> prompt. Send the config (config.bin) with the terminal program using zmodem. 2. 3. 4. When the download is finished, the BRU3 will reboot. 5. Get the BRU3 into software transfer mode again by following steps 1 and 2 (if you do not already have a CMD> prompt). 6. Send the main software (main_sw.mfe) with the terminal program using zmodem. 7. When the download is finished, the BRU3 will reboot. 8. Get the BRU3 into software transfer mode again by following steps 1 and 2 (if you do not already have a CMD> prompt). 9. Type B WP2: MAIN_SW.MFE at the prompt. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE, MODULE B1 11 (60) 10. The BRU3 should reboot and you will receive the CMD> prompt. Type B WP2: MAIN_SW.MFE again and the BRU3 will reboot once more. 11. When the second reboot is finished, the BRU3 will display USERNAME:.

(It may take a while for the BRU3 to warm up) 12. Press enter twice to get past the USERNAME and PASSWORD prompts. 13. Issue the command SET BOOT MASTER WP2: MAIN_SW.MFE Y at the NODOP prompt. 14. Check that the software is installed permanently by issuing the NODOP command SHOW BOOT. The following step can now be performed, but in your case it should not be necessary:

Enter !!! and set the thumb wheel in position 0 for normal mode. Note!

If the main software is still present on the WP2: disk, steps 3-8 may be omitted. You can check if the software is present by issuing the command DI at the command prompt (that is, right before step 2). BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10 12 (60) BRU3 MANUAL 1.4 Network Connections Figure 4 Line interface block diagram. 1.4.1 General There are three alternative line interfaces for connection to MOX:

telephone modem V.32 balanced serial interface V.11 (RS422B) unbalanced serial interface V.28 (RS232C). BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE, MODULE B1 13 (60) The choice between telephone modem, balanced serial interface and unbalanced serial interface, is made via hardware strapping, i.e., only one line interface alternative is available at a time. In some BRU3 variants the telephone modem is not applicable which means that only a balanced serial interface and an unbalanced serial interface are available. The hardware strapping is made by setting switch 2 (SW2) on the FE Computer Board as follows:

SW2:1 Open or Closed Open Closed SW2:2 Open Open Open Other alternatives not allowed. SW2:4 Open Switch 2 SW2:3 Open Closed Closed Comments OEM-Strap Comments V.32bis V.28 (RS232) V.11 (RS422) 1.4.2 Telephone Modem Boards The telephone modem, which supports the CCITT V.32 and V.32bis standards, consists of two separate boards, the FE Modem Board V.32 (FMB) and the FE Adaptation Board (FAB). Depending on national requirements issued by the telecommunications administration in each country, different versions of the FAB may be used. Also, the information regarding telephone modem in this manual may not be applicable to all BRU3 variants. Two-wire leased, four-wire leased or switched lines are used for data transmission. The maximum transmission rate is 14 400 bits/sec. The modem is connected to the computer part via a synchronous serial circuit. Asynchronously transferred AT/Hayes commands are used for modem configuration and check. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10 14 (60) BRU3 MANUAL The software used by the modem is installed from the main processor and stored in a memory. The FMB does not include a reset button. The FMB and FAB are reset when the main processor is reset. Connectors FE Modem Board (FMB) Figure 5 FE Modem Board (FMB). P1 2x20 pin header with 0.1" module: For connecting the V.24 interface and power from the main board of the BRU3, and also, connection of the analog/digital signals between the FMB and FAB. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE, MODULE B1 15 (60) FE Adaptation Board (FAB) Figure 6 FE Adaptation Board (FAB). The FE Adaptation Board (FAB) includes two connectors, P1 and P2. P1 P2 2x10 pin header male connector with 0.1" module used for inter connection to the FMB. 2x4 pin header male connector with 0.1" module used for connection of the various telephone lines. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10 16 (60) BRU3 MANUAL FE Connection Board (FNB) Figure 7 FE Connection Board (FNB). The FE Connection board (FNB) includes conversion circuits for V.11 and V.28 standards for the serial interfaces. It also includes voltage protection and filters for the modem, the V.11, the V.28 and the console ports. The FNB contains the following connectors:

P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 9-pole D-SUB male, used for CONSOLE connection 9-pole D-SUB female, used for alarm connections 9-pole D-SUB female, used for connection of telephone lines

(RS232-MOX) 25-pole D-SUB male, used for modem connection.

(RS422-MOX) 25-pole D-SUB male used for modem connection. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE, MODULE B1 17 (60) 1.5 Logic Units 1.5.1 General Figure 8 FE Computer Board (FCB). 1.5.2 Connections The FE Computer Board includes two ports, A and B, for serial communication, both handled by the integrated circuit Z16C35. Network Connection (Port A) Port A implies complete synchronous functionality, and also, limited modem support. By the FNB and FMB, this port can be used for V.24/V.28, V.24/V.11 or V.24/V.32. CONSOLE and NODOP Connection (Port B) Port B is intended for using a CONSOLE and NODOP via the FNB with the V.24 signals RX and TX. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10 18 (60) BRU3 MANUAL 1.5.3 LEDs LED Colour Function Status indicator Yellow Lit when the processor is operating OK. Watchdog alarm Red Lit when the Watchdog is released. If so, a reset pulse is generated. The Watchdog LED is lit and the signal WDSTATUS, read by the CPU, peaks. 1.5.4 Reset Button To enable hardware reset of the FCB and the FMB (Modem Board), and also, the FRB (FE Radio Board), the FCB is equipped with a reset button located next to the LED Status indicator. To reach the button for a reset operation, use a pen or a similar object. A reset of the FCB may be generated for the following reasons:

1. Power-on reset: The reset is generated at power-on, and also, when a power drop occurs. 2. Switch reset: The reset is activated when the reset button is pressed. 3. Watchdog reset. The reset is activated by the watchdog function if not maintained. 4. CPU reset: The reset is performed by the CPU when a reset instruction is executed. In this specific case no reset of the CPU itself is carried out. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE, MODULE B1 19 (60) 1.6 Radio Units 1.6.1 General The BRU3 is designed for duplex traffic 8 kbit GMSK modulation on the 400, 800 or 900 MHz band. Figure 9 FE Radio Board (FRB) - 900 MHz. Figure 10 FE Radio Board (FRB) - 800 MHz and 900 MHz. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10 A v e R 7 9 1 1 0 4 E Z L

2 8 8 2

1 2 20 (60) BRU3 MANUAL Figure 11 FE Radio Board (FRB) - 400 MHz. TX A 4 0 2 1 0 4 E Z L

4 2 4 1

8 1 RX Figure 12 FE Radio Board (FRB) - 400 MHz, ROA 117 8897 BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE, MODULE B1 21 (60) 1.6.2 Radio Operation The BRU3 radio units are operated locally on site by using a portable PC and FBTEST. By using FBTEST, it is possible to set TX and RX frequencies, transmitter power, alarm levels, parameters, etc. Selecting "Radio Operations" on the FBTEST Main menu makes it possible to select between the following submenu alternatives:

1. TRANSCEIVER SETUP MENU 2. MEASUREMENT SETUP MENU 3. 4. 5. TRANSCEIVER CONTROL AND PRESENTATION MENU CALIBRATION RADIO REGISTER EDITOR 6. ADJUSTMENT 7. SETUP For detailed information on radio operations, please refer to the FBTEST Reference Manual. 1.6.3 Reset To reset the FE Radio board, press the reset button on the FE Computer board resetting both the computer board and radio board. 1.6.4 Connectors 1 connector: For antenna input cable (coaxial) 1 connector: For antenna output cable (coaxial) For location, see Figure 9 through Figure 12. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10 22 (60) BRU3 MANUAL 1.7 Power Supply 1.7.1 General Figure 13 Power supply block diagram. The BRU3 power supply parts are located in the FE Case bottom frame (FBF). The power supply parts include the FE Power Supply Unit (FPU) and the FE Battery Unit (FBU). The FE Heating Unit (FHU) located in the FE Case Top Frame (FTF), is also regarded as a part of the power supply. The power supply parts are to be used for:

Uninterruptible power supply with distribution of 14V and 5V DC to the FCB and FRB

Lightning protection

Fused mains feed-through to the FHU. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE, MODULE B1 23 (60) 1.7.2 FE Power Supply Unit (FPU) Figure 14 FE Power Supply Unit (FPU). 120 or 230V AC input Power outlet to heater 1. 2. 3. Mains switch Battery switch 4. Fuse 1, 6.3AT 250V 5. 6. Fuse 2, 6.3AT 250V 7. Fuse 3, 6.3AF 250V 8. Mains, status indicator LED 9. 10. Error, alarm LED 14V, status indicator LED The FE Power Supply Unit (FPU) distributes power to the modem, logic, radio and heating units. To secure uninterrupted power function, a battery charge check checks that the batteries maintain the highest capacity possible. Failure due to low charging is also reported to the FCB. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10 24 (60) BRU3 MANUAL Connectors Connector Type To/From MAINS INLET POWER OUTLET TO HEATER POWER OUTLET INT. SUPPLY J1 J2 J3 Switches 120 or 230V AC power input to the FPU 120 or 230V AC power output to the FHU Power output to the FCB (5V and 14.7V) and power input from the FBU (14.7V) Switch Function MAINS SWITCH AC power supply on/off switch BATTERY SWITCH Battery power supply on/off switch BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE, MODULE B1 25 (60) LEDs LED Colour Function MAINS Yellow Lit when incoming 120 or 230V AC power is OK.

+14V Yellow Lit when +14V DC and +5V DC power distribution to the radio unit and the DC/DC module is OK. ERROR Red Sum alarm indicates a power failure in the FPU if one or more of the following causes occur:

1. +14V and/or +5V DC failure. 2. Charging current too low. 3. Fuse F3 is broken. 4. S1 - "ON", S2 - "OFF" and the battery is connected. NOTE!

This cause is not applicable for R3 or later FPU versions. The red "ERROR" LED will also be lit if the mains voltage is too low and the battery is discharged. The red "ERROR" LED and the yellow "+14" LED will flicker if the FPU is not correctly connected. Note!

Note!

Fuses Fuse Type Safety device for F1 6.3AT 250V 6.3AT 5x20 mm Mains input F2 6.3AT 250V 6.3AT 5x20 mm F3 6.3AF 250V 6.3AF 5x20 mm Power to/from the FBU BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10 26 (60) BRU3 MANUAL 1.7.3 FE Battery Unit (FBU) Figure 15 FE Battery Unit (FBU). The FE Battery Unit (FBU) is located in the case bottom frame. The FBU includes a battery pack of 12 NiCd cells 1.2V 4Ah, with extended temperature range. The battery pack is designed to withstand continuous charge. The battery unit will start supplying the BRU3 with power when the main power supply goes below 90/198V. The unit is able to supply the BRU3 with power for 30 minutes (39xx) and 15 minutes (34xx and 38xx) respectively. A temperature sensor is included in the battery pack to ensure that the charging current is not too strong when the temperature is high or low. The sensor is connected to the charger in the FPU. For information on how to perform a battery test, please refer to 2.4 Maintenance to be Performed in this section. Connector The FBU includes a 3-pin snap-in connector for connection to the FPU. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE, MODULE B1 27 (60) 1.7.4 FE Heating Unit (FHU) Figure 16 FE Heating Unit (FHU). The FE Heating unit (FHU) is located in the FE Case Top Frame (FTF). The FHU ensures that the temperature inside the BRU3 is within the requested limits. The unit consists of the FE Heating Board (FHB) including a heating regulator and a overheating protection device. When the temperature on the surface of the FTF is about 25 C or lower, the FHU starts heating the BRU3. If the temperature should rise to about 55 C, due to temperature regulating failure, the overheating protection will cut of the power supply to the FHU. Connectors The FHU includes a 6-pin connector for incoming AC from the Power supply unit. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10 28 (60) BRU3 MANUAL 1.8 Alarms The BRU3 includes the following hardware alarms:

Alarm Description Temperature alarm HIGH Inside temp. exceeds +70 C. Temperature alarm LOW Inside temp. is below -20 C. Shut off AC alarm DC alarm Alarm signal indicates immediate BRU3 shut-off due to Temp. alarm. Unspecified AC failure. Unspecified DC failure. Low or high +14V or/and +5V. Battery charge alarm Charge failure, low charging current. Usual causes:

1. Battery switch off. 2. Battery fuse (No.3) broken. 3. Battery charger out of order. 4. Battery pack out of order. Reflection alarm Output RF power/Voltage Standing Wave Ratio exceeding alarm limit set. Transmitter/Receiver alarm Unspecified Transmitter or Receiver failure. Low output power alarm Output power below alarm limit set. External alarm 1 For customer use. Case alarm The alarm is used for checking that the BRU3 is closed, i.e. a physical access check. For information regarding the setting of alarm limits, please refer to 1.7 Power Supply in this section. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE, MODULE B1 29 (60) 2 Maintenance 2.1 General This section describes how to carry out scheduled, visual and preventive maintenance on the BRU3 on site. The scheduled, visual and preventive maintenance is carried out to increase the operational reliability of the electrical and mechanical parts of the BRU3. If running a Function Check on a BRU3 mounted outdoors, it is recommended that the check be carried out under weather-protected conditions for the service personnel and test equipment used. If any problems occur while following the procedures in this section, please refer to 3 Troubleshooting. For 38xx and 39xx maintenance is carried out every:

6 Months (Radio Unit Reference Oscillator and Battery Test) For 34xx maintenance is carried out every:

12 Months (Radio Unit Reference Oscillator) 6 Months (Battery Test) Note!

If the BRU3 has to be switched off, the shutdown procedure described in 1.3 Start-Up and Shutdown Procedures, must be followed before power-off is performed. If not, important data may be lost and the subsequent start-up time may be significantly increased. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10

30 (60) BRU3 MANUAL 2.2 Equipment Required To carry out maintenance on the BRU3 on site, the following equipment is required:

Portable PC including VT-100 emulation software

FE Console Cable TSRA 902 0190 for connection of the PC to the BRU3

"P1-CONSOLE" port

Frequency counter 1 GHz Degree of accuracy: 0.01 ppm

Set of screw drivers

FBTEST software (normally installed in the BRU3) 2.3 Documentation Required To carry out maintenance on the BRU3 on site, the following documentation is required:

BRU3 Manual (the BRU3 modules in the Mobitex NTE Client Library) Node SW - Operation and Maintenance module Node SW - Installation and Commissioning module BRU3 - Site documentation module Note:

The Site Documentation module is not included in the electronically published version of the Mobitex NTE Client Library but is delivered on paper together with the hardware. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE, MODULE B1 31 (60) 2.4 Maintenance to be Performed 2.4.1 Visual and Preventive Maintenance Radio Unit Reference Oscillator In the BRU3, the reference oscillator checks the channel unit frequency. Thus, adjustment check of the reference oscillator, in accordance with the following procedure, implies check of the channel unit frequency accuracy. Note!

Only authorized personnel are allowed to adjust the frequency of the reference oscillator. Requirements The measurement must be carried out on the correct carrier frequency for the site. The carrier wave must not have a frequency error exceeding 0.1 ppm (38xx and 39xx) or 0.2 ppm (34xx). The reference oscillator must have been powered up at least 30 minutes before the test is started. Test equipment

Portable PC including VT-100 emulation software

FE Console Cable TSRA 902 0190

FBTEST software

Frequency counter 1 GHz (degree of accuracy: 0.01 ppm)

RF attenuator 1 GHz, 30-50 dB. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10 32 (60) BRU3 MANUAL Test procedure Note!

To carry out the test and adjustment procedure, the BRU3 has to be switched off. Please refer to the shutdown procedure described in this section. 1. Connect the frequency counter via the RF attenuator to the BRU3 TX ANT. connection. 2. Use FBTEST to set the correct transmitter carrier frequency for the site. 3. 4. 5. Select the power, which corresponds to -6 dB attenuation of the transmitter. Start the transmitter. Read the frequency measured on the frequency counter display. Check the result against the requirements specified. Adjustment Use FBTEST for transmitter adjustment. FE Computer Board (FCB)

Check that the Watchdog alarm LED is not lit.

Check that the CPU status indicator is lit (yellow light). FE Power Supply Unit (FPU)

Check that the sum alarm LED is not lit.

Check that the AC and DC status indicator LEDs are lit (yellow light).

Check the power cable and connector for damage. Replace if necessary. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE, MODULE B1 33 (60) 2.4.2 Battery Test Every 6 months, and always before visiting a BRU3 site for regular maintenance work, it is recommended to perform a battery test. The battery test, which is described below, is executed from NODOP or from OM at the NCC. Description The Battery Test is performed by switching the node power supply to battery power supply and measuring the time for the battery to get discharged below a certain limit. When the limit is reached, the node power is switched back to normal power supply and an alarm is sent to the NCC. Requirements The time for the battery test is defined by the operator. Test procedure 1. Start the test by the OM/NODOP command ACTIVATE BATTERY_TEST. The node power supply is switched to battery power and the time for the batteries to get discharged is measured. When the batteries are discharged, the node power is switched back to normal power supply and an alarm is sent to the NCC. Read the measured value on the display. The OM/NODOP command SHOW BATTERY_TEST presents the result of both the current, and last completed, battery test. Recommended:

39xx: 30 min. (15 min. for the 6W version) 34xx and 38xx: 15 min. Check the result against the requirements specified. Replace the battery unit, if necessary. 2. 3. 4. Note!

The battery should be in operation for at least 60 hours before an initial battery test may be performed for the first time after power-

up. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10 34 (60) BRU3 MANUAL A battery test cannot be started under the following conditions:

A battery test is already running

The temperature inside the BRU3 is not within the range 20-40 C

The batteries are already discharged

The Node back-up time is out of range. 2.5 Function Check 2.5.1 General In addition to the regular Check and Visual and Preventive Maintenance program previously described, a Function Check, which is described below, may be performed if so requested by the operator. The Function Check includes checking BRU3 boards, transmitter, receiver, antennas and hardware alarms. Furthermore, the Function Check may be used as an extended hardware commissioning test as a complement to the hardware commissioning procedure previously described in this manual. 2.5.2 Equipment Required To carry out the Function Check, the following equipment is required:

Power meter

Multimeter

Ericsson test modem LPBA 109 08 or RF signal generator 1 GHz with a built-in GMSK-modulator 1 pc of Radio Communication test set, including

- RF signal generator 1GHz, with external FM DC input

- Modulation Meter. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE, MODULE B1 35 (60) 2.5.3 Check of Internal Power Supply (Mains and Battery) Check of internal power supply Requirements The required value of the internal power supply should be:

with mains supply:

5V 0.2V, 8V 0.5V and 14.7V 0.3V. with Battery supply:

5V 0.2V, 8V 0.5V and 14.1V 0.3V, using fully charged batteries. Test equipment

Voltmeter Test procedure (Mains supply) 1. Set the Main switch to position "1". Make sure that the yellow LEDs, MAINS and +14V, are lit. 2. Measure the voltage in the FCB measure points marked "+14V", "+5V"

and "+8V". 3. Read the value measured on the voltmeter display. Check the result against the requirements specified. Test procedure (Battery supply) 1. Make sure that the "BATTERY SWITCH" on the FPU is in position "1". The yellow LED indicating "14V" on the FPU should be lit. 2. Set the "MAINS SWITCH" on the Power supply unit to position "0". Make sure the yellow LED "MAINS" is not lit. 3. Measure the voltage in the FCB measure points marked "+14V", "+5V"

and "+8V". 4. Read the value measured on the voltmeter display. Check the result against the requirements specified. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10 36 (60) BRU3 MANUAL Figure 17 Measurement points on FCB. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE, MODULE B1 37 (60) 2.5.4 FBTEST Board Test Check of BRU3 boards Requirements It is required that a Medium board test of all BRU3 boards should be carried out before taking the BRU3 into operation. No errors are accepted. Test equipment

Portable PC including VT-100 emulation software

FE Console Cable TSRA 902 0190

FBTEST software. Test procedure 1. Use FBTEST to set up two test cycles. 2. 3. Run the test cycles. Read the result on the terminal display. Check the result against the requirements specified. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10 38 (60) BRU3 MANUAL 2.5.5 Channel Unit Output Power Check of the transmitter channel unit output power Requirements The nominal output power differs depending on the BRU3 version purchased. For tolerances, please refer to the tables below:

900 MHz, 3W version:

Power 900 MHz 3.0W 1.5W 800mW 400mW 200mW 100mW 50mW 25mW Attenuation (dB) Tolerance (+dB) Tolerance (-dB) 0

-3

-6

-9

-12

-15

-18

-21 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 Measurements must carried out on the correct carrier frequency for the 39xx. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE, MODULE B1 39 (60) 800 MHz, and 900 MHz, 6W version:

Power 800 MHz 6.0W 3.0W 1.5W 800mW 400mW 200mW 100mW 50mW Attenuation (dB) Tolerance (+dB) Tolerance (-dB) 0

-3

-6

-9

-12

-15

-18

-21 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.0 2.0 3.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 Measurements must carried out on the correct carrier frequency for the 38xx. 400 MHz:

Power 400 MHz Attenuation (dB) Tolerance (+dB) Tolerance (-dB) 6.0W 3.0W 1.5W 800mW 400mW 200mW 100mW 50mW 0

-3

-6

-9

-12

-15

-18

-21 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 Measurements must be carried out on the correct carrier frequency for the 34xx. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10 40 (60) BRU3 MANUAL Test equipment

Portable PC including VT-100 emulation software

FE Console Cable TSRA 902 0190

FBTEST software

Output power meter 39xx, 3W version: 20 mW - 5W 38xx, and 39xx, 6W version: 50 mW - 10W 34xx: 50 mW - 10W Degree of accuracy: better than 0.5 dB

Coaxial cable. Test procedure 1. Connect the output power meter to the BRU3 antenna connection. 2. Use FBTEST to set the correct transmitter carrier frequency for the site. 3. Use FBTEST to select the desired power level. 4. 5. Start the transmitter. Read the power measured on the output power meter display. Check the result against the requirements specified. 6. Select a new power level and repeat the measurement procedure. Note!

The adjustment of output power is normally carried out via NCC. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE, MODULE B1 41 (60) 2.5.6 Transmitter Deviation Check of transmitter frequency deviation Requirements The sine wave 1 kHz shall give the frequency deviation of 2.0 kHz + 5.0%. The measurements must be carried out on the correct carrier frequency for the site. Test equipment

Portable PC including VT-100 emulation software

FE Console Cable TSRA 902 0190

FBTEST software

Deviation meter 900 MHz, 800 MHz or 400 MHz Degree of accuracy: better than 3.0%. Test procedure 1. Connect the deviation meter to the BRU3 TX ANT. connection. 2. Use FBTEST to set the correct transmitter carrier frequency for the site. 3. 4. 5. 6. Select the power level which corresponds to -6 dB attenuation of the transmitter. Select modulation test sequence. Start the transmitter. Read the deviation frequency measured on the deviation meter display. Check the result against the requirements specified. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10 42 (60) BRU3 MANUAL 2.5.7 Bit Errors at high Signal Levels Check of the bit error rate at high signal levels Requirements The measurement should be carried out within a time period of 60 seconds. The RF signal level to the receiver should be -81 dBm. The tolerated failure rate during the test period is set to 0 or 1 error. The measurement should be repeated with a RF signal of -11 dBm. The above measurements must be carried out on the correct carrier frequency for the site. Test equipment

Portable PC including VT-100 emulation software

FE Console Cable TSRA 902 0190

FBTEST software

Alternative 1 or 2 described below. Alternative 1

Ericsson test modem LPBA 109 08

RF signal generator 1 GHz. The RF signal generator must include an input for external modulation with a lower limiting frequency of 0 Hz. The frequency must be able to modulate with DC voltage. Degree of frequency accuracy: 0.01 ppm. The RF output signal level must be adjustable between

-123 dBm and -3 dBm. Accuracy: Better than 1 dB. Alternative 2

RF signal generator 1 GHz with a built-in GMSK-modulator. The generator must be able to generate the 511 bit PRBS signal used when measuring the bit error rate. (Using this alternative excludes the Ericsson test modem specified above.) Accuracy: Better than 1 dB. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE, MODULE B1 43 (60) Test procedure 1. Connect the signal generator to the BRU3 antenna connection. 2. Use FBTEST to set the receiver channel number corresponding to the correct carrier frequency. 3. Set the signal generators carrier frequency to the receivers nominal carrier frequency. The GMSK modem supplies the RF signal generator with an analog pseudo-random signal which matches the test signal M2. This signal modulates the RF signal generator. (In case the RF signal generator is equipped with a built-in GMSK modem the external GMSK modem is excluded.) The receiver demodulated signal BER, is calculated by the BRU3 logic. 4. Start the bit error measurement using FBTEST. 5. Adjust the RF signal level sent to the receiver to -81 dBm. Check the bit error rate during a period of three minutes. 6. 7. Check the result against the requirements specified. Set a new (- 11 dB) RF signal level on the signal generator and the BRU3, and repeat the measurement procedure. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10 44 (60) BRU3 MANUAL 2.5.8 Receiver Sensitivity Check of the receiver sensitivity Requirements The receiver sensitivity is defined as the RF level on the receiver antenna connection which generates a BER value of 1%. The RF signal sent to the receiver should be modulated with the M2 test signal with a frequency deviation of 2.00 kHz. At 1% BER, the signal level to the receiver should be -117 dBm, or better. At a signal level of -107 dBm to the receiver antenna connection, the BER value should be better than 0.01%. The above measurements must be carried out on the correct carrier frequency for the site. Test equipment

Portable PC including VT-100 emulation software

FE Console Cable TSRA 902 0190

FBTEST software

Alternative 1 or 2 described below. Alternative 1:

Ericsson test modem LPBA 109 08

RF signal generator 1 GHz. The RF signal generator must include an input for external modulation with a lower limiting frequency of 0 Hz. The frequency must be able to modulate with DC voltage. Degree of frequency accuracy: 0.01 ppm. The RF output signal level must be adjustable between

-123 dBm and -3 dBm. Accuracy: Better than 1 dB. Alternative 2:

RF signal generator 1 GHz with a built-in GMSK modulator. The generator must be able to generate the 511 bit PRBS signal used when measuring bit errors. (Using this alternative excludes the Ericsson test modem specified above. Accuracy: Better than 1 dB.) BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE, MODULE B1 45 (60) Test procedure 1. Connect the signal generator to the BRU3 TX ANT. connection. 2. Use FBTEST to set the receiver channel number corresponding to the correct carrier frequency. 3. Set the signal generators carrier frequency to the receivers nominal carrier frequency. The GMSK modem supplies the RF signal generator with an analog pseudo random signal matching the test signal M2. This signal modulates the RF signal generator. (In case the RF signal generator is equipped with a built-in GMSK modem the external GMSK modem is excluded.) The receiver-demodulated signal BER, is calculated by the BRU3 logic. 4. Start the bit error measurement using FBTEST. 5. Adjust the RF signal level sent to the receiver until the BER value is stabilized to 1.0%

6. 7. Check the result against the requirements specified. Repeat the measurement procedure and adjust the RF signal level sent to the receiver until the BER value is stabilized to 0.01%. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10 46 (60) BRU3 MANUAL 2.5.9 Receiver Sensitivity at Frequency Deviation Check of the receiver sensitivity when the incoming RF signal deviates from the requirements specified Requirements The RF signal sent to the receiver must be modulated with the M2 test signal. The frequency deviation should rate 95% of the normal deviation, 1.90 kHz. The RF signal frequency offset should be 1.45 kHz. The measurement should be performed with both positive and negative offset on the centre frequency. At 1% BER, the RF signal level sent to the receiver should be -114 dBm, or better. The above measurements must be carried out on the frequencies listed under Measurement Frequencies in the Introduction and Product Specification section of the BRU3 - General module. Test equipment

Portable PC including VT-100 emulation software

FE Console Cable TSRA 902 0190

FBTEST software

Alternative 1 or 2 described below. Alternative 1:

Ericsson test modem LPBA 109 08

RF signal generator 1 GHz. The RF signal generator must include an input for external modulation with a lower limiting frequency of 0 Hz. The frequency must be able to modulate with DC-voltage. Degree of frequency accuracy: 0.01 ppm. The RF output signal level must be adjustable between

- 10 dBV emf and + 110 dBV emf. Accuracy: Better than 1 dB. Alternative 2:

RF signal generator 1GHz with a built-in GMSK-modulator. The generator must be able to generate the 511 bit PRBS signal used when measuring bit errors. (Using this alternative excludes the need of the Ericsson test modem specified above.) Accuracy: Better than 1 dB. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE, MODULE B1 47 (60) Test procedure 1. Connect the signal generator to the BRU3 TX ANT. connection. 2. Use FBTEST to set the receiver channel number corresponding to the correct carrier frequency. 3. Set the signal generators carrier frequency to the receivers nominal carrier frequency, including offset. The GMSK modem supplies the RF signal generator with an analog pseudo-random signal that matches the test signal M2. This signal modulates the RF signal generator. (In case the RF signal generator is equipped with a built-in GMSK modem, the external GMSK modem is excluded.) The receiver demodulated signal BER, is calculated by the BRU3 logic. 4. Start the bit error measurement using FBTEST. 5. Adjust the RF signal level sent to the receiver until the BER value is stabilized to 1.0%

6. 7. Check the result against the requirements specified. Set a new receiver frequency on the signal generator and the BRU3, and repeat the measurement procedure. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10 48 (60) BRU3 MANUAL 2.5.10 Antenna input Signal Check of the receiver signal strength level Requirements The RF signal generator must be unmodulated. Measurement range: -113 dBm to -53 dBm, in steps of 10dB. The measured accuracy on the RSSI-signal may deviate by up to 5dB. The above measurement must be carried out on the correct carrier frequency for the site. Test equipment

Portable PC including VT-100 emulation software

FE Console Cable TSRA 902 0190

FBTEST software

RF signal generator 1 GHz. Degree of frequency accuracy: 0.01 ppm. The RF output signal level must be adjustable between -123 dBm and -3 dBm, with an accuracy of 1dB. Test procedure Note!

The transmitter has to be switched off before starting the test procedure is started. 1. Connect the signal generator to the BRU3 RX ANT. connection. 2. Use FBTEST to set the receiver channel number corresponding to the correct carrier wave frequency. 3. 4. Set the signal generators carrier wave frequency to the receivers nominal carrier wave frequency. The signal generator carrier wave must be modulated. Change the RF signal generator output level throughout the measurement range in steps of 10 dB. 5. Check the result against the requirements specified. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE, MODULE B1 49 (60) 2.5.11 Transmitter Antenna VSWR Check of the Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR). Requirements The power level must be set to a level corresponding to a feeder loss (Lf) of 0 dB, i.e., maximum output power. At maximum output power the required VSWR value should be < 2.0. The measurement of the VSWR value should be carried out on the frequency for the site. It is important to use an external power meter. The internal power meter is only intended to give an indication of the VSWR value and to make it possible to generate an alarm when a configurable level has been exceeded. The absolute accuracy of the internal power meter depends on the antenna and cable configuration. The VSWR values measured at the antenna connector must be adjusted to the feeder loss of the installation according to the table below. Feeder Loss, Lf [dB]

Required VSWR Required Return Loss, PF-PR [dB]

VSWR Alarm Level Return Loss Alarm Level

[dB]

0 1 2

< 2.0

< 1.7

< 1.5

> 10

> 12

> 14 3.5 2.6 2.1 5 7 9 Note!

The VSWR alarm levels are the recommended values. The individual settings for each BRU3 is decided by the operator. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10 50 (60) BRU3 MANUAL Test equipment

Portable PC including VT-100 emulation software

FE Console Cable TSRA 902 0190

FBTEST software

External Power Meter Test procedure 1. Connect the transmitter antenna feeder to the external power meter and then the power meter via cable (RG 214) to the Tx Antenna connector on the FNB. 2. On request, enter !!! and set the virtual thumb wheel to position 7. 3. Use FBTEST to set the transmitter channel number corresponding to the correct carrier frequency. 4. Turn on the transmitter output power by means of FBTEST. 5. Measure the PF and PR value using the external power meter. 6. Calculate the VSWR value by using the following formula, or the nomogram in Figure 18. VSWR = (x + 1)/(x - 1), x = 10E((PF - PR)/20) For example if VSWR = 1.5, then PF - PR = 14 dB. 7. Estimate the total feeder loss of the installation and use the corresponding row in the table above to check that the measured VSWR value (received from the nomogram in Figure 18 or the formula above) complies with the required VSWR value. 8. Note the feeder loss, the measured VSWR value and the corresponding VSWR alarm level in the Commissioning Test Record. The VSWR alarm level shall be set using NETREG in NCC. 9. Turn off the transmitter output power by means of FBTEST. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE, MODULE B1 51 (60)

) R P

F P

B d

s s o L n r u t e R 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0 1 1,1 1,2 1,3 1,4 1,5 1,6 1,7 1,8 1,9 2 VSWR Figure 18 VSWR nomogram. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10 52 (60) BRU3 MANUAL 2.5.12 Hardware Alarm Status Check of alarm status in BRU3 Requirements All alarms shall be in NORMAL mode, defined as follows:

Alarm Status EXT_ALM1 INACTIVE (ON)

(Open Case Alarm) LOWTMP INACTIVE (OFF)

(Temperature Alarm HIGH) CHERR INACTIVE (OFF)

(DC Alarm) ACERR INACTIVE (OFF)

(External Alarm 1) CASE_ALM INACTIVE (OFF)

(Temperature Alarm LOW) HIGHTMP INACTIVE (OFF)

(Battery Charge Alarm) DCERR INACTIVE (OFF)

(AC Alarm) TxRxError

(Transmitter/Receiver Fault Alarm) INACTIVE (N) VSWR INACTIVE (N)

(Low Output Power Alarm) Test equipment

(Reflection Alarm) Low Tx power INACTIVE (N)

Portable PC including VT-100 emulation software

FE Console Cable TSRA 902 0190

FBTEST software. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE, MODULE B1 53 (60) Test procedure 1. 2. Select "STATUS OVERVIEW" on the Main Menu. Read the alarm status obtained on the terminal screen. Check the result against the requirements specified. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10 54 (60) BRU3 MANUAL 3 Troubleshooting 3.1 General This section provides information on the measures to be taken if errors should be found in the BRU3. The section describes the measures to be taken on site. Most of the measures carried out during troubleshooting generate alarms at the NCC, and also, will effect the nodes function. Therefore, the NCC operator shall always be consulted before any measure is carried out on site. The service personnel must be familiar with the BRU3 units before using this section. For information about each unit, please refer to 1 Design, Function and Operation in this section. In most cases, faults are caused by units not working properly, or switches set to invalid positions. Should the instructions herein not sufficiently provide the requested help in order to locate and/or remedy the error, please contact your local Field Support Centre (FSC). For information regarding how to trouble-shoot software errors, please refer to the Node Software User's Guide in the Node SW - Operation and Maintenance module. Note!

If the BRU3 has to be switched off, the shutdown procedure described in 1.3 Start-Up and Shutdown Procedures, must be followed before power off is performed. If not, important data may be lost and the subsequent start-up time may be significantly increased. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE, MODULE B1 55 (60) 3.2 Power Supply Units 3.2.1 FE Power Supply Unit (FPU) Indication: "MAINS" LED* is not lit. Possible cause Action MAINS SWITCH set to "0". Set MAINS SWITCH to "1". Fuse(s) F1-F2 defective. Replace fuse(s). Incoming power cable/ connector defective. Replace incoming power cable/connector. Incoming AC power failure. Check site AC power distribution. FPB defective. Replace FPU if necessary.

* Is lit when incoming 120/230V AC power is OK. Indication: "14V" LED** is not lit. Possible cause Action Fuse(s) F1-F3 defective. Replace fuse(s). Cable/connectors between FPU and FBU defective or not connected to the FCB. Replace cable/connectors. Low power in Battery pack. Check Battery pack power level. Recharge the Battery.

** Is lit when the 14V DC power distribution to the radio unit and the DC/DC module is OK. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10 56 (60) BRU3 MANUAL Indication: "ERROR" LED* is lit. Possible cause Action Fuse(s) F1-F3 defective. Replace fuse(s). Cable/connectors between FPU and FBU defective or not connected to the FCB. Check cable/connectors. Replace if necessary. FPB defective. Replace the BRU3 if necessary.

* Indicates an unspecified power or charger failure in the FE Power Supply Unit

(FPU). 3.2.2 FE Battery Unit (FBU) The FE Battery Unit (FBU) does not include LEDs for alarm or status indication. For troubleshooting the FBU, please refer to 3.2.1 FE Power Supply Unit (FPU) in this section. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE, MODULE B1 57 (60) 3.3 Logic and modem units 3.3.1 FE Computer Board (FCB) Indication: STATUS indicator LED* is not lit. Possible cause Action Power failure. FCB defective. Check power distribution on FCB, measure point "5V". Reset BRU3 via FCB reset button:

1) If BRU3 starts, run FBTEST Board Test for further check. 2) If BRU3 does not start, replace the BRU3. Run FBTEST Board Test, (please refer to the FBTEST Reference Manual). Replace the BRU3 if FCB is found to be defective.

* Is lit when the processor is operating normally. Indication: WATCHDOG alarm LED** is lit. Possible cause Action Hardware fault on FCB. Software error. Run FBTEST Board Test, (please refer to the FBTEST Reference Manual). If FCB is found to be defective, replace the BRU3. Contact your local Field Support Centre (FSC) for further assistance.

** The Watchdog is released. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10 58 (60) BRU3 MANUAL 3.3.2 FE Modem Board (FMB) & FE Adaptation Board (FAB) Note!

The FE Modem Board and the FE Adaptation Board do not include LEDs for alarm or status indication. Indication: Modem out of order or working improperly. Possible cause Action Incorrect modem setup in FBTEST. Incorrect dip switch setting on FCB. Cables/Connectors not properly connected. FMB or FAB defective. Check modem setup in FBTEST Modem menu. Check dip switch (SW2) setting on FCB. Check cables/connectors. Replace if necessary. Run FBTEST Board Test. Replace FE Case Top Frame if FMB is found to be defective. Replace BRU3 complete if FAB is found to be defective. 3.3.3 FE Connection Board (FNB) Note!

The FNB does not include LEDs for alarm or status indication. Indication: Connections/connectors defective. Possible cause Action FNB defective. Run FBTEST Board Test. To run extended FNB test, plugs must be adapted to the RS422 and RS232 connections on FNB. Replace BRU3 complete if FNB is found to be defective. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE, MODULE B1 59 (60) 3.4 Radio units 3.4.1 FE Radio Board (FRB) Note!

The FRB does not include LEDs for alarm or status indication. Indication: Radio units out of order or working improperly. Possible cause Action FRB defective. Run FBTEST Board Test including FCB. Replace FE Case Top Frame if FRB or FCB is found to be defective. If no fault is found, please refer to 2.5 Function Check in this section, describing a number of radio tests possible to perform by using FBTEST. Replace the BRU3 if necessary. Antenna cables or connections defective. Check antenna cables and connections. Replace if necessary. 3.5 FE Heating Unit (FHU) 3.5.1 FE Heating Board (FHB) Note!

The FHB does not include LEDs for alarm or status indication. Indication: Heating unit out of order or working improperly. Possible cause Action Low temperature inside the BRU3. Check the heating unit (probably out of order). Replace the BRU3. No power distribution to FHU. Check FHU connection to FPU. Replace connector if necessary. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10 60 (60) BRU3 MANUAL BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1543-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-10

 

 

Site Requirements Contents 1 Introduction ................................................................................................. 3 1.1 The Mobitex System ........................................................................ 3 1.2 BRU3 Presentation........................................................................... 4 1.2.1 Technical Performance ......................................................... 5 2 Preparations Before Installation .................................................................. 7 2.1 Storage.............................................................................................. 7 2.2 Transport .......................................................................................... 7 2.3 Before Installation............................................................................ 7 2.3.1 Material and Tools That Are Not Provided by Ericsson ...... 8 2.4 Space Required................................................................................. 9 2.4.1 General................................................................................ 10 2.4.2 Above the BRU3................................................................. 10 2.4.3 Below the BRU3................................................................. 10 2.4.4 On both sides of the BRU3 ................................................. 11 In front of the BRU3........................................................... 11 2.4.5 2.4.6 Installation Alternatives...................................................... 11 3 Power Requirements.................................................................................. 14 4 Cables and External Connections.............................................................. 15 4.1 General ........................................................................................... 15 4.2 Connecting Power .......................................................................... 18 4.3 Connecting Network Communication............................................ 21 4.3.1 Integrated V.32 Telephone Modem .................................... 23 4.3.2 Unbalanced serial port, RS 232C........................................ 24 4.3.3 Balanced serial port, RS 422B............................................ 25 4.4 Connecting the Alarm .................................................................... 26 4.4.1 Alarm Loop for Customers Use ........................................ 27 4.5 Connecting the Antenna................................................................. 29 5 Grounding.................................................................................................. 31 6 Connecting Antenna Cables and Mounting Antennas............................... 32 7 Lightning Protection .................................................................................. 35 BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1533-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-06-11 BRU3 MANUAL The contents of this document are subject to revision without notice due to continued progress in methodology, design and manufacturing. Ericsson shall have no liability for any errors or damages of any kind resulting from the use of this document. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1533-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-06-11 SITE REQUIREMENTS 3 (36) 1 Introduction This document covers the site preparations to be made before the Mobitex Base Radio Unit 3 (BRU3) is installed, in terms of space required, power consumption, environmental data, cables, grounding, antenna etc. The instructions in the BRU3 - Installation module should be followed when installing the BRU3. Before installation takes place, the site should be prepared in accordance with what is described in this document. This is important not only for a correct and safe installation, but also for saving time. 1.1 The Mobitex System Mobitex is a digital packet switching network for data, text and status communication. Subscriber terminals can be either fixed or mobile. The network includes services for emergency (alert) messages. The nodes in the network are connected to each other in a strictly hierarchical structure. The mobile terminals communicate by radio with the radio base stations, which are connected to an area exchange. Each area exchange is upwards connected to a main exchange, which can be found at one or more levels. The main exchange at the highest level, also referred to as the top node, connects the network to the Network Control Centre (NCC). The network is supervised from the NCC and this is also where the subscription information is entered into the system. The fixed terminals, which are connected directly to an area exchange, consist of terminals or computers. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1533-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-06-11 4 (36) BRU3 MANUAL 1.2 BRU3 Presentation Base Radio Unit 3 (BRU3) is a complete one-channel compact radio base station which uses 8 kbps data signalling and is designed for the 400, 800 and 900 MHz band. The BRU3, which may be installed outdoors or indoors, is a link between the mobile terminals (MOB) and the area exchanges (MOX) in the Mobitex Network. The BRU3 contains logic, modem units, radio units, a power supply unit including AC/DC and DC/DC converters, a battery backup and a heating unit. All parts are integrated in the case shown below. The BRU3 is equipped with connections for antenna, power, line, modem, alarms and console terminal. Figure 1 BRU3 pole installation. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1533-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-06-11 SITE REQUIREMENTS 5 (36) 1.2.1 Technical Performance BRU3 Dimensions Width:

Height:

Depth:

472 mm 345 mm (incl. 40 mm handle) 202 mm Weight 39xx:

18 kg 38xx 18 kg 34xx:

19 kg Environmental Classifications Water resistant:

Europe: class IP 43 according to IEC 529 US:

class 3R according to UL 50 Weather-Protected Locations:

ETS 300 019-1-3: Environmental Class 3.3, with extended temperature range for 34xx. 39xx:

-25 C to +55 C 38xx

-25 C to +55 C 34xx:

-33 C to +55 C BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1533-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-06-11 6 (36) BRU3 MANUAL Non-Weather-Protected Locations:

ETS 300 019-1-4: Environmental Class 4.1 with extended temperature range for 34xx. 39xx:

-25 C to +40 C 38xx

-25 C to +40 C 34xx:

-33 C to +40 C BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1533-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-06-11 SITE REQUIREMENTS 7 (36) 2 Preparations Before Installation Generally, the BRU3 can be installed at most locations, both in- and outdoors. However, it is important that the BRU3 is always mounted on the Base Plate included in the FE Installation Kit. 2.1 Storage The BRU3 delivery package is made according to the ETS 300 019-1-1 standard, class 1.3 for storage. It is recommended to have plans for long term storage verified by Ericsson. 2.2 Transport The BRU3 is to be transported in accordance with the ETS 300 019-1-2 standard, class 2.3 for public transportation. It is recommended to have plans for long term storage verified by Ericsson. 2.3 Before Installation On delivery, all components in the BRU3 are installed. Only the external cables for power, the lines and the antenna feeder are to be plugged into the BRU3 on installation. By ordering all peripheral equipment before the BRU3 is delivered, you will be able to prepare the site for faster installation and commissioning of the BRU3. Contact your local Ericsson company for further information. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1533-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-06-11 8 (36) BRU3 MANUAL 2.3.1 Material and Tools That Are Not Provided by Ericsson Below is specified the material and tools that will not be delivered by Ericsson along with the BRU3:

Network Communication Connection Box.

Bolts (4 pcs of M10x70mm) for wall mounting of the Base Plate and Bolt Expanders 4 pcs (type HILTI HDE M10). Used for wall mounting only.

Copper Grounding Cable >=16mm 2 (AWG 5) and Cable Lug (M8).

Antenna equipment.

Antenna Cable RG 214/U-60 (outer diameter 10.8 mm) and a feeder (for example FLEXWELL 7/8" or 1 5/8").

A Suhner crimp tool kit, 76 Z-0-0-15, used for mounting Suhner 11 TNC-

50-7-2c connectors to the RG 214/U-60 antenna cable.

Sealing material for antenna cable connectors.

Cable ties.

Padlocks for locking the BRU3. Please refer to the BRU3 - Installation module for details and instructions. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1533-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-06-11 SITE REQUIREMENTS 9 (36) 2.4 Space Required When deciding where to install the BRU3, it is important to keep in mind that:

Accessibility must be maintained to allow for installation and maintenance.

The longer the feeders and communication cables are, the higher the attenuation will be.

The site shall provide an ambient temperature preventing the BRU3 to exceed its maximum operation temperature. The ambient temperature shall be measured 100 mm below the handle. The space required for a BRU3 is shown in Figure 2 Space required.. Also refer to the text below for further information. Figure 2 Space required. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1533-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-06-11 10 (36) Note!

BRU3 MANUAL To facilitate service procedures, the BRU3 may be mounted more than 100 mm above the floor. Due to legal requirements, at outdoor installations the BRU3 must not be mounted closer than 500 mm to a horizontal or inclined surface which might allow water to splash into the cable inlet. 2.4.1 General The space specified in this document is a minimum to allow an adequate airflow around the equipment. The customer decides if any additional working space is needed around the BRU3. 2.4.2 Above the BRU3 Minimum: 100 mm To allow opening of the top cover, 100 mm of free space is necessary above the case. If the top cover is to be replaceable without having to dismount the case, 300 mm of free space above the case is required. 2.4.3 Below the BRU3 Minimum, indoor: 100 mm *

Minimum, outdoor: 500 mm *

* Please refer to the Note! above. To be able to run the cables safely, 100 mm of free space is necessary below the case. Several BRU3 cases can be installed together, one above the other. For outdoor installations, refer to the Note! above. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1533-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-06-11 SITE REQUIREMENTS 11 (36) 2.4.4 On both sides of the BRU3 Minimum: 100 mm To allow opening of the padlocks on each side, 100 mm of free space is necessary on both sides of the case. 2.4.5 In front of the BRU3 Minimum: 450 mm, excluding working space To allow opening of the top cover, 450 mm of space from the wall or the pole behind the case is necessary. The specified distance of 450 mm does not include working space. 2.4.6 Installation Alternatives The common BRU3 installation alternatives are:

Wall installation

Horizontal pole installation (pole diameter 15-100 mm)

Vertical pole installation (pole diameter 15-100 mm) The BRU3 must always be mounted on the Base Plate, included in the FE Installation Kit (FIK) NTMA 102 22/1. If the BRU3 is to be installed on a pole, the FE Mounting Bracket 100, NTMA 102 23/1, should be used. If none of the above installation alternatives is usable, other arrangements have to be made so that the Base Plate can be used. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1533-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-06-11 12 (36) BRU3 MANUAL Figure 3 Wall installation. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1533-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-06-11 SITE REQUIREMENTS 13 (36) Figure 4 Horizontal pole installation. Figure 5 Vertical pole installation. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1533-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-06-11 14 (36) BRU3 MANUAL 3 Power Requirements The BRU3 is supplied with 120 or 230 V AC with the following characteristics:

39xx and 38xx:

Voltage:

120 V AC or 230 V AC Voltage variation:

90 - 140 V AC or 198 - 254 V AC Nominal voltage:

110 - 130 V AC or 220 - 240 V AC Frequency:

Site Fuse:

50/60 Hz 10 A (The site fuse is to be provided by the customer.) Power Consumption:

Max. 500 W 34xx:

Voltage:

230 V AC Voltage variation:

198 - 254 V AC Nominal voltage:

220 - 240 V AC Frequency:

Site Fuse:

50/60 Hz 10 A (The site fuse is to be provided by the customer.) Power Consumption:

Max. 900 W Note!

BRU3 is not intended for use in an IT power distribution system, please refer to IT Power System in the Safety Instructions section. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1533-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-06-11 SITE REQUIREMENTS 15 (36) 4 Cables and External Connections 4.1 General All cables provided by the customer must be in position and ready to be connected to the BRU3 before the installation takes place. Each cable delivered by Ericsson is equipped with a connector at the BRU3 end. The other end is delivered without a connector, which means that the operator can choose any suitable connector or socket. The power and console cables are delivered with connectors at all ends. Make sure that the site has been prepared with both the connection block and the suitable connectors for the cables, before the installation takes place. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1533-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-06-11 16 (36) BRU3 MANUAL Figure 6 Cable to be provided by the customer. 1. Only one of the Line communication cables may be used. 2. One antenna cable, if duplex filter is installed. Two antenna cables, if bandpass filter is installed. Feeder loss is recommended to equal or be less than 2 dB. Note!

The Ground and Antenna cables are to be provided by the customer. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1533-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-06-11 SITE REQUIREMENTS 17 (36) Figure 7 BRU3 external connections. shows where to connect the BRU3 cables. Use the figure to plan the cable arrangements. The types of connector mentioned in the following sections always correspond to the cable connector to the BRU3. Figure 7 BRU3 external connections. Pos. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Function Antenna Connector, Rx Antenna Connector, Tx or Combined Rx/Tx Power Connection Telephone Line Connection Modem Connection RS 422B Modem Connection RS 232C Alarm Connection Console Connection BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1533-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-06-11 18 (36) BRU3 MANUAL The console connection is not described in the following sections. 4.2 Connecting Power The Power Connection Kit is used to connect the BRU3 to the mains (Outdoor:

39xx and 38xx - No NTM 201 1126/1, 34xx - No NMT 201 1127/1). The kit includes a Power Supply Cable, a Connection Box (of the weather-protected type) and a Protection Tube (a field wiring terminal and a non-metallic, liquid-

proof conduit for outdoor use). A 120 or 230 V AC cable is used for the power supply. At the BRU3 end of the power supply cable there is an IEC connector which should be plugged into the BRU3. The other end should be connected to the mains via the connection box, according to Figure 8 Power connection - 39xx.. 39xx and 38xx:

Condr Cable PE L1 N 34xx:

Condr Cable PE L1 N Colour Size Ground (safety) lead Green or green/yellow 1.5 mm2 (AWG16) 1.5 mm2 (AWG16) Line 1.5 mm2 (AWG16) Neutral Black White Colour Ground (safety) lead Green/yellow Line Neutral Brown Blue Size 1.5 mm2 (AWG16) 1.5 mm2 (AWG16) 1.5 mm2 (AWG16) The maximum length of the cable between the BRU3 and the power connection box should not exceed 1 m. When the site has been prepared for installation, there should be a weather-

protected, non-live power supply cable installed, ready to be connected to the BRU3 power connection box. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1533-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-06-11 SITE REQUIREMENTS 19 (36) Figure 8 Power connection - 39xx. Pos. Function BRU3 End Connector 3 Power Connection IEC, female BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1533-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-06-11 20 (36) BRU3 MANUAL Figure 9 Power connection - 34xx. Pos. Function BRU3 End Connector 3 Power Connection IEC, female BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1533-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-06-11 SITE REQUIREMENTS 21 (36) 4.3 Connecting Network Communication Cables for network communication to the MOX are available for RS 232C, RS 422B and telephone line communication. Therefore, the BRU3 is equipped with three different connectors. Only one alternative can be used at a time. An alarm interface is also available. The network communication cable from the BRU3 must be connected to a socket. When installed outdoors, the socket should be housed in a connection box of the weather-protected type, which is to be provided by the customer. The socket must allow for between 6 and 20 connections depending on the type of line communication used, as specified below in Figure 10 Network communication connection. (min: Telephone only, max: RS 422B and Alarm). The minimum socket connection area for all wires is 0.22 mm2. The maximum length of the cable between the BRU3 and the communication connection box should not exceed 1 m. The cable diameter for all network communication cables is 8 mm. Specifications for each cable, which are found in the following sections, can be used for correct installation of the cables to the connection block. When the site has been prepared for installation, there should be a weather-

protected (at outdoor locations) network communication box installed where the network communication cable will be connected. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1533-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-06-11 22 (36) BRU3 MANUAL Figure 10 Network communication connection. Pos. Function BRU3 End Connector No. of plinth connections 4 5 6 7 Telephone Line Connection D-SUB 9-pole, male 6 Modem Connection RS 422B D-SUB 25-pole, female 16 Modem Connection RS 232C D-SUB 25-pole, female Alarm Connection D-SUB 9-pole, female 9 4 BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1533-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-06-11 SITE REQUIREMENTS 23 (36) 4.3.1 Integrated V.32 Telephone Modem Communication:

Synchronous, V.32 or V.32bis Speed:

Line type:

Max. 9600 b/s (14 400 b/s for V.32bis) Two-wire, or four-wire, leased lines (see below) BRU3 end connector: D-SUB 9-pole, male Connector Specification:

Only the pins that are used are shown below. Pin Twist Colour Signal Description 1 2 3 4 6 7 a a b b c c Brown Black Red LRA LRB Leased Line, 4-wire, (RX) Leased Line, 4-wire, (RX) LT/2WA Leased Line 4-wire transmit or Leased Line 2-wire (RX and TX) Black LT/2WB Leased Line 4-wire transmit or Leased Line 2-wire (RX and TX) Orange Black SWA SWB Switch Line Switch Line Fallback mode to switched telephone lines can be used. Note!

The information regarding telephone modems in this manual may not be applicable to all BRU3 variants. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1533-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-06-11 24 (36) BRU3 MANUAL 4.3.2 Unbalanced serial port, RS 232C Communication:

Synchronous, serial Speed:

Electrical:

Logical:

Max. 19.200 bps V.28 V.24 BRU3 end connector: D-SUB 25-pole, female Max. dist. to DCE:

17 m (50 ft) Connector Specification:

Only the pins that are used are shown below. Pin Twist Colour Signal Description 1 2 3 4 7 8 15 NC 17 NC 20 24 a b c a c d d e e f f Screen Brown Red GND (101) Protective Ground TX (103) Transmit Data RX (104) Receive Data Orange RTS (105) Request to Send Black Black SGND (102) Signal Ground DCD (109) Data Carrier Detect Yellow TC (114) Transmit Clock Black Green Black Blue Black RC (115) Receive Clock DTR (108) Data Terminal Ready ETC (113) Ext. Transmit Clock Note!

To choose between RS 232C and RS 422B, use the SW2 dip switch on the FCB. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1533-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-06-11 SITE REQUIREMENTS 25 (36) 4.3.3 Balanced serial port, RS 422B Communication:

Synchronous, serial Speed:

Electrical:

Max. 64.000 bps V.11 (EIA-422-A) Logical signals:

V.24 BRU3 end connector: D-SUB 25-pole, female Max. dist. to DCE:

A few kilometres, depending on transmission speed and type of cable. Connector Specification:

Only the pins that are used are shown below. Pin Twist Colour Signal Description 1 2 3 4 8 9 11 12 13 14 15 17 19 20 a b c d d a b c e e f f g Screen Brown Red GND (101) Protective Ground TX_A (103) Transmit Data RX_A (104) Receive Data Orange RTS_A (105) Request to Send Yellow DCD_A (109) Data Carrier Detect Black Black Black Black Green Black Blue Black Violet DCD_B (109) Data Carrier Detect TX_B (103) Transmit Data RX_B (104) Receive Data RTS_B (105) Request to Send TC_B (114) Transmit Clock TC_A (114) Transmit Clock RC_A (115) Receive Clock RC_B Receive Clock DTR_A (108) Data Terminal Ready BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1533-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-06-11 26 (36) BRU3 MANUAL 22 23 24 g h h Note!

Black Grey Black DTR_B (108) Data Terminal Ready ETC _B(113) External Transmit Clock ETC _A(113) External Transmit Clock To choose between RS 232C and RS 422B, use the SW2 dip switch on the FCB. 4.4 Connecting the Alarm Electrical:

0.5 mA, 12 V BRU3 end connector: D-SUB 9-pole, female Max. dist. to DCE:

20 m (60 ft) Connector Specification:

Pin Twist Colour Function Description a a b b 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 Brown VCC_EXT Galvanic separated +12 V, Voltage Supply Black Red Black Screen Black AL1+

AL1-

Alarm Loop for customers use Alarm Loop for customers use GND_EXT Ground for VCC_EXT AL2+

Alarm Loop for customers use Yellow AL2-

Alarm Loop for customers use Note!

The AL2+/AL2- Alarm Loop is by default strapped for the Open Case Alarm. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1533-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-06-11 SITE REQUIREMENTS 27 (36) 4.4.1 Alarm Loop for Customers Use The diagrams below show how the alarm loop can be used, with or without an internal power supply. The circuit diagrams show the FE Connection Board (FNB) in the BRU3 and how the FE Alarm Cable is connected. In the examples, the switch could be replaced with any type of alarm equipment. A parameter in the NMS is used to set the alarm to indicate whether the switch is open or closed. Figure 11 External alarm powered by the BRU3. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1533-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-06-11 28 (36) BRU3 MANUAL Figure 12 External alarm with external power supply. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1533-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-06-11 SITE REQUIREMENTS 29 (36) 4.5 Connecting the Antenna The BRU3 has either a duplex filter or bandpass filters installed. The duplex filter makes it possible to use a combined Rx/Tx antenna, while the bandpass filters require separate Rx and Tx antennas. Figure 13 Connection for combined RX/TX antenna. Pos. Function Connector Cable 2 Antenna Connection TNC-male RG214/U-60 BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1533-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-06-11 30 (36) BRU3 MANUAL Figure 14 Connection for separate antenna. Pos. Function Connector Cable 1 2 Rx Antenna Tx Antenna TNC-male TNC-male RG214/U-60 RG214/U-60 BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1533-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-06-11 SITE REQUIREMENTS 31 (36) 5 Grounding The grounding systems should meet the requirements of the national standards. It is the responsibility of the customer to ensure that the external grounding system at the site is adequate and that the grounding system for the equipment can easily and satisfactorily be connected to it. When the BRU3 is installed, the ground cable should be connected to the Base Plate (as specified in the installation instructions), to which the BRU3 itself is grounded. The other end of the ground cable should be connected to the main station ground. The grounding material needed includes a Copper Grounding Cable >=16mm2

(AWG 5) and a stainless Cable Lug (M8), to be provided by the customer. The M8 Grounding Bolt is included in the Installation Kit from Ericsson. For grounding of the antenna equipment, please refer to Ground Connection in the Installation Instructions section of the BRU3 - Installation module. When the site has been prepared for installation, there should be a ground cable installed, ready to be connected to the BRU3 Base Plate. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1533-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-06-11 32 (36) 6 BRU3 MANUAL Connecting Antenna Cables and Mounting Antennas In case the antenna cable is longer that 5 m, a feeder is required as specified in the table below. Please refer to Figure 15 Antenna cable, shorter than 5 m. and Figure 16 Antenna cable, longer than 5 m. for mounting instructions. RG214/U-60 (jumper) Flexwell 7/8" (feeder) Flexwell 1 5/8" (feeder) Impedance 50 ohms 50 ohms 50 ohms Loss 22 dB/100 m 3.9 dB/100 m 2.1 dB/100 m Max. dist. between clamps 1 m Bending radius

(minimum) 55 mm 1 m 1 m 250 mm 500 mm It is recommended to have the antenna cable connectors sealed properly. Silicon grease and butyl rubber tape can be used to seal them. Total feeder loss is recommended to equal to or less than 2 dB. The antenna foot must be grounded. If a feeder is used and if the antenna cable is longer than 5 m, the antenna cable connectors have to be grounded as shown in Figure 16 Antenna cable, longer than 5 m.. When the site has been prepared for installation, there should be a weather-

protected antenna cable installed, ready to be connected to the BRU3. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1533-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-06-11 SITE REQUIREMENTS 33 (36) Figure 15 Antenna cable, shorter than 5 m. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1533-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-06-11 34 (36) BRU3 MANUAL Figure 16 Antenna cable, longer than 5 m. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1533-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-06-11 SITE REQUIREMENTS 35 (36) 7 Lightning Protection The lightning protection systems should meet the requirements of the national standards. It is the responsibility of the customer to ensure that the existing lightning protection system at the site is adequate. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1533-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-06-11 36 (36) BRU3 MANUAL BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1533-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-06-11

 

 

Safety Instructions Contents 1 Introduction ................................................................................................. 3 2 Safety Instructions ....................................................................................... 4 2.1 Definition of Expressions................................................................. 5 3 IT Power System ......................................................................................... 6 4 Precautions .................................................................................................. 7 4.1 High Voltage .................................................................................... 7 4.2 Grounding ........................................................................................ 7 4.3 Radio Frequency Exposure .............................................................. 7 5 Poisonous Substances .................................................................................. 8 5.1 Nickel Cadmium (NiCd) .................................................................. 8 5.1.1 Locating and Removing the Battery Pack ............................ 8 5.2 Beryllium Oxide (BeO).................................................................. 10 5.2.1 Existence of Beryllium Oxide in BRU3 ............................. 10 5.2.2 Grade of Toxicity................................................................ 11 5.2.3 Symptoms of Poisoning ...................................................... 11 5.2.4 First Aid .............................................................................. 11 5.2.5 Handling Components Containing Beryllium Oxide.......... 11 5.2.6 End of Life Treatment......................................................... 12 5.2.7 Labels.................................................................................. 12 5.2.8 Locating and Removing the Beryllium Oxide Component 13 5.3 Electro Static Discharge (ESD)...................................................... 20 6 Rules and Requirements - Europe ............................................................. 21 6.1 General Safety Statements ............................................................. 21 6.2 Statements for Connection to Telephone Networks in the UK...... 22 7 Rules and Requirements - USA/Canada.................................................... 23 7.1 FCC - Rules and Requirements...................................................... 23 7.2 BRU3 Classification....................................................................... 23 7.3 BRU3 Interference ......................................................................... 23 7.4 BRU3 Changes or Modifications ................................................... 24 BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 124 46-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev G, 2003-06-10 BRU3 MANUAL 7.5 Government Requirements and Equipment Return ........................24 7.5.1 USA .....................................................................................24 7.5.2 Canada .................................................................................26 8 Electrical Safety .........................................................................................28 8.1 Safety Instructions ..........................................................................28 The contents of this document are subject to revision without notice due to continued progress in methodology, design and manufacturing. Ericsson shall have no liability for any errors or damages of any kind resulting from the use of this document. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 124 46-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev G, 2003-06-10 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 3 (28) 1 Introduction This section contains Safety Instructions for handling the MOBITEX Base Radio Unit 3 (BRU3) during installation and maintenance work. Please read the Safety Instructions before starting any kind of installation or maintenance work. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 124 46-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev G, 2003-06-10 4 (28) BRU3 MANUAL 2 Safety Instructions Note!

Reduce the risk of accidents by studying all the instructions carefully before starting work. If questions arise regarding the safety instructions, contact your supervisor or the local Ericsson company. Read and follow all warning notices and instructions found on the product or included in the BRU3 manual. Ericsson takes no responsibility if the labels have disappeared from a BRU3 due to accident or age. Where local regulations exist, these are to be followed. The safety information in this manual is a supplement to local regulations. It is the responsibility of the local project manager to make certain that local regulations are known and followed. The relevant manual (including this safety information) and specific instructions supplied by Ericsson must be followed in any work performed on the Ericsson products or systems. Sufficient knowledge of English or of any of the other languages in which the manuals or instructions are printed is necessary. The safety information in the relevant manuals presupposes that any person performing work on Ericsson products or systems has the necessary education, training and competence required in order to perform that work correctly. For certain work, additional training or special training may be required. For more precise information on the amount and content of the general and/or special training required for work on Ericsson products or systems, please contact the supervisor or the local Ericsson company. The BRU3 is intended to be used with a three-wire mains connection plug - a plug which has a grounding pin. This is a safety feature. Grounding of the BRU3 is vital to ensure safe operation. Do not defeat the purpose of the grounding type plug by modifying the plug or using an adapter. The slots and openings in the bottom of the BRU3 are provided for ventilation. To ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating, these slots and openings must not be blocked or covered. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 124 46-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev G, 2003-06-10 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 5 (28) Make sure that the FE Power Supply cable is not squeezed by anything and do not place the cable in such a way that there is a risk of people treading on it. General purpose cables are provided with the BRU3. The provision of special cables, which may be required by a regulatory inspection authority for the installation site, is the responsibility of the customer. When installed in the final configuration, the BRU3 must comply with the applicable safety standards and regulatory requirements of the country in which it is installed. If necessary, consult with the appropriate regulatory agencies and inspection authorities to ensure compliance. 2.1 Definition of Expressions The following definitions of hazard degree are used in this document:

DANGER!

Expresses a hazard that, if neglected, could be either fatal or cause life-long injuries to a human being, and/or destroy the equipment. WARNING!

Expresses a hazard that, if neglected, could cause severe injuries to a human being, and/or severe damage to the equipment. CAUTION!

Expresses a hazard that, if neglected, could cause injuries to a human being, or damage to equipment. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 124 46-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev G, 2003-06-10 6 (28) BRU3 MANUAL 3 IT Power System The BRU3 is not intended for use in an IT power distribution system. Type approval testing in accordance with EN60950, UL1950 and CSA 22.2 No. 950 has been performed excluding IT-systems. An IT power system is a power distribution system having no direct connection to earth, only the exposed conductive parts of the electrical installation are grounded. Figure 1 Example of an IT power system. Note!

For more details on IT power distribution systems and test procedures, please refer to the standard documents.

(Please note that IT Power distribution systems are not very widespread and the abbreviation should not be confused with the well-known abbreviation for Information Technology). BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 124 46-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev G, 2003-06-10 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 7 (28) 4 Precautions 4.1 High Voltage DANGER!

The BRU3 is powered by 120 or 230V AC. During normal operation, live terminals or components are not accessible. If the BRU3 front cover is opened during operation, for maintenance or commissioning purposes, live terminals or components are exposed. 4.2 Grounding DANGER!

Grounding must be done before the MAIN SWITCH on the FE Power Supply Unit (FPU) is switched on. Before operation of the BRU3, ensure that the BRU3 is grounded in accordance with the Installation Instructions. 4.3 Radio Frequency Exposure BRU3 base stations are typically mounted in areas not available to general public. Applicable distances for RF exposure assessment will in praxis exceed the radio frequency near-field range. Thus, the specific absorption rate does not need to be considered, unless radiating parts of the installation are located closer than one meter to areas accessible to general public. DANGER!

The BRU3 is marketed without antenna. Every installation of a BRU3 must maintain safety distances between radiating parts (for example, the antenna) and general public in order to meet applicable radio frequency exposure requirements under all circumstances of normal operation and service work being performed. BRU3 installation, and antenna connection should be performed only by professional personell, with suitable qualification to assess potential radio frequency hazards. BRU3 output power, duty cycle, feed-line loss, combiner loss and antenna characteristics shall be considered. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 124 46-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev G, 2003-06-10 8 (28) BRU3 MANUAL 5 Poisonous Substances 5.1 Nickel Cadmium (NiCd) WARNING!

The BRU3 contains a Nickel Cadmium battery pack.

Handle the battery pack with care. Do not expose it to fire or crush it; the battery pack may release toxic substances.

Do not short-circuit. The battery pack may cause burns.

There is danger of explosion if the battery pack is incorrectly replaced. Replace the battery pack with the same type recommended by Ericsson.

Return used batteries to Ericsson. In the future the label in Figure 2 will mark the metallic shield covering the battery pack inside the BRU3. Ni-Cd Cd Figure 2 This label is used to mark the battery pack. 5.1.1 Locating and Removing the Battery Pack Suitable tools:

A standard screwdriver CAUTION!

Before any part of the BRU3 is dismantled, all connections to power supply must be disconnected. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 124 46-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev G, 2003-06-10 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 9 (28) Refer to Figure 3 for the different parts of the BRU3:

1 = FE Case Bottom Frame (FBF) 2 = FE Power Supply Unit (FPU) 3 = FE Battery Unit (FBU) 4 = FE Mains Power Cable 3 A v e R 7 9 1 1 0 4 E Z L

2 8 8 2

4 2 1 2 4 Figure 3 Base Radio Unit 3 (BRU3) 1. Unlock and open the BRU3. 2. Unplug the FE Mains Power Cable from the FE Power Supply Unit (FPU), refer to Figure 3. 3. Set the BATTERY SWITCH on the FPU to position 0. 4. Disconnect the power supply cable from the FE Battery Unit (FBU) by pressing the snap-in and at the same time pulling out the cable connector, refer to A in Figure 4. 5. Unscrew the slot-headed screw holding the FBU to the FE Case Bottom Frame (FBF), refer to B in Figure 4. 6. Remove the FBU by lifting it straight up from the FBF. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 124 46-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev G, 2003-06-10 10 (28) BRU3 MANUAL A B A v e R 7 9 1 1 0 4 E Z L

2 8 8 2

6 1 Figure 4 Removal of the FE Battery Unit (FBU) 5.2 Beryllium Oxide (BeO) DANGER!

Study these instructions carefully before starting work with the BRU3 to reduce the risk of accidents. If questions arise regarding the safety instructions, contact the supervisor or the local Ericsson company. Follow existing local regulations. The safety information in this manual is only a supplement to local regulations. 5.2.1 Existence of Beryllium Oxide in BRU3 BRU3 for 400 MHz and 900 MHz may contain Beryllium Oxide. In the future non-toxic substances will be used instead of Beryllium Oxide. It is easy to decide which BRU3 contains Beryllium Oxide because of the warning labels outside and inside the BRU3. If the outside warning label has disappeared, open the BRU3 to make sure. If BRU3 contains Beryllium Oxide, it is found in small amounts in ceramic form in the power amplifier on the FE radio board (FRB). Note!

BRU3 for 800 MHz does not contain Beryllium Oxide. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 124 46-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev G, 2003-06-10 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 11 (28) 5.2.2 Grade of Toxicity Beryllium Oxide dust is very dangerous if inhaled, even for only a few seconds. It may cause injury to skin or mucous membranes severe enough to endanger life or cause permanent injury. Particles penetrating the skin through wounds or abrasions are liable to cause chronic ulcerations. If an FE radio board containing Beryllium Oxide has exploded, the site must be cleaned by authorized personnel, considering the rules and regulations of your country. Dust can also be created if the ceramic form is broken, chafed or filed. 5.2.3 Symptoms of Poisoning Symptoms of Beryllium Oxide poisoning are respiratory troubles or cyanosis

(grey-blue discoloration of the skin). These symptoms may develop within a week or after a period of several years. 5.2.4 First Aid Suspected inhalation of Beryllium Oxide must be treated immediately by a doctor at a hospital. Suspected skin contact with Beryllium Oxide or penetration of the skin through cuts or abrasions must be treated by thoroughly washing the area with water immediately. This should be followed by a medical examination. 5.2.5 Handling Components Containing Beryllium Oxide As long as Beryllium Oxide is encapsulated in its ceramic form it is safe to handle. The ceramic form must not be damaged in any way, for example, do not file, ground, scrape or treat the ceramic with acid or mechanically damage it in any way. Components containing Beryllium Oxide must be treated with special care:

Compressed air should not be used to clean units containing Beryllium Oxide.

Disused Beryllium Oxide components must be treated as environmentally hazardous waste. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 124 46-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev G, 2003-06-10 12 (28) BRU3 MANUAL If damaged components containing Beryllium Oxide leave dust or particles you must use a safety mask, eye protectors, protective gloves and protective clothing. Collect the dust and particles with wet rags and place the wet rags in plastic bags and seal thoroughly, and treat the rags as environmentally hazardous waste.

Dispose of defective or broken Beryllium Oxide components in approved containers, with tight-fitting capping. Mark them clearly on the outside of the wrapping: COMPONENTS CONTAIN BERYLLIUM OXIDE.

Never send the ceramic form containing Beryllium Oxide through the mail. Instead, return them to the nearest depot manually in person.

Beryllium Oxide must be transported to special waste handling. Instructions to remove the ceramic form containing Beryllium Oxide is to be found on the next page. 5.2.6 End of Life Treatment Before shredding the BRU3, the Beryllium Oxide Component must be removed for special treatment. This instruction describes how to remove it. The presence of components containing Beryllium Oxide is clearly marked, using the labels described below. 5.2.7 Labels There are different types of warning labels used for BRU3 containing Beryllium Oxide. Ericsson takes no responsibility if the labels have disappeared from a BRU3 due to accident or age. At least one the following labels are used. WARNING THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS COMPONENTS WITH BERYLLIUM OXIDE, THE DUST OF WHICH IS TOXIC. SEE USER MANUAL BEFORE SCRAPPING. Figure 5 This label is used outside the BRU3. Older BRU3 may not have it. User manual refers to this manual. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 124 46-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev G, 2003-06-10

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 13 (28)

BERYLLIUM OXIDE

(Toxic) used in the equipment. See Instruction book. Figure 6 This label is used inside the BRU3 containing beryllium oxide. In the future it should also be used on the lid of the bigger metallic cover on the FE Radio Board for 900 MHz. The FE Radio Board for 400 MHz does not have this extra cover. Instruction book refers to this manual. Poison BeO Figure 7 This label is used on the metallic lid covering the Beryllium Oxide Ceramic Component. 5.2.8 Locating and Removing the Beryllium Oxide Component Suitable tools:

A standard screwdriver

A TORX TX10 screwdriver

A pair of cutting pliers

A small adjustable spanner or an 8 mm spanner CAUTION!

Before any part of the BRU3 is dismantled, all connections to power supply must be disconnected. 1. Please read the whole section before taking any action. 2. Unlock and open the BRU3. The Beryllium Oxide component is included on the FE Radio Board. The FE Radio Board is underneath one of the filter modules, see Figure 8. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 124 46-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev G, 2003-06-10 14 (28) BRU3 MANUAL A v e R 7 9 1 1 0 4 E Z L

2 8 8 2

3 Figure 8 The FE Radio Board containing the Beryllium Oxide component is located underneath one of the filter modules. The BRU3 in the figure is used for 900 MHz. A BRU3 used for 400 MHz looks the same but has bigger filter modules and the cable kit between the lids is mounted between the filter modules instead. 3. Unscrew the four screws and loosen the cable kit between the lids to be able to remove the large black filters, as per Figure 9. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 124 46-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev G, 2003-06-10 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 15 (28) A v e R 7 9 1 1 0 4 E Z L

2 8 8 2

5 1 Figure 9 Removing four screws and a cable kit. 4. Unscrew all screws needed to remove the large metallic plate with the filter modules as per Figure 10. A v e R 7 9 1 1 0 4 E Z L

2 8 8 2

4 Figure 10 Removing filter modules with metallic plate. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 124 46-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev G, 2003-06-10 16 (28) BRU3 MANUAL 5. Locate the FE Radio Board, see Figure 11. A 4 0 0 0 0 4 R 7 9 9 5 W 0 8 R O A 1 1 7 2 0 1 5

2 A 4 0 R 2 G A v e R 7 9 1 1 0 4 E Z L

2 8 8 2

7 1 Figure 11 Locating the FE Radio Board in the FE Case Bottom Frame (FBF). The FE Radio Board is to the right in the figure. 6. Make sure that the FE Radio Board is undamaged. Do not work with the BRU3 if the FE Radio Board looks burned or damaged in any way. If this is the case close the BRU3 and treat the BRU3 as beryllium oxide hazardous waste. Note!

For a BRU3 used for 900 MHz proceed to step 10. For a BRU3 used for 400 MHz continue with the following steps. 7. Unscrew the two screws as per Figure 12. ROA 117 2015/2 A400004R79 95W08 R2G A40 Figure 12 Removing two screws. A v e R 7 9 1 1 0 4 E Z L

2 8 8 2

5 BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 124 46-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev G, 2003-06-10 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 17 (28) 8. Lift off the loosened metallic cover. The Beryllium Oxide component is now visible. Cut the seven pins and the small metallic tongue as per Figure 13. A v e R 7 9 1 1 0 4 E Z L

2 8 8 2

6 ROA 117 2015/2 A400004R79 95W08 R2G A40 Figure 13 Locating the seven pins and the small metallic tongue to be cut off. 9. Remove the loosened Beryllium Oxide component by lifting it off as per Figure 14. A v e R 7 9 1 1 0 4 E Z L

2 8 8 2

7 ROA 117 2015/2 A400004R79 95W08 R2G A40 Figure 14 Removing the Beryllium Oxide component from the board. The component containing Beryllium Oxide is now removed. Steps 10 to 13 refer to BRU3 900 MHz only. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 124 46-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev G, 2003-06-10 18 (28) BRU3 MANUAL For BRU3 used for 900 MHz:

10. Remove the metallic cover as per Figure 15. Figure 15 Removing the metallic cover. 11. Unscrew the two screws as per Figure 16. A v e R 7 9 1 1 0 4 E Z L

2 8 8 2

8 A v e R 7 9 1 1 0 4 E Z L

2 8 8 2

9 Figure 16 Removing two screws. 12. Lift off the loosened metallic cover. The Beryllium Oxide component is now visible. Cut the four pins as per Figure 17. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 124 46-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev G, 2003-06-10 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 19 (28) A v e R 7 9 1 1 0 4 E Z L

2 8 8 2

0 1 Figure 17 Locating the four pins to be cut off. 13. Remove the loosened Beryllium Oxide component by lifting it off as per Figure 18. A v e R 7 9 1 1 0 4 E Z L

2 8 8 2

1 1 Figure 18 Removing the Beryllium Oxide component from the board. The component containing Beryllium Oxide is now removed. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 124 46-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev G, 2003-06-10 20 (28) BRU3 MANUAL 5.3 Electro Static Discharge (ESD) CAUTION!

All types of electronic components, particularly integrated circuits, are in some way sensitive to Electro Static Discharge (ESD). Damage caused by ESD is a common reason for faults in electronic equipment. The total operating time between failures can be extended considerably by avoiding ESD damage during installation and maintenance work. This has become more important as electronic components decrease in size and increase in sensitivity. The following ESD basic rules have to be followed when working with electronic components.

Avoid materials or clothes that easily create electrostatic charges.

Retain spare parts in their transport packaging until just before use.

Ensure that PCBs (Printed Circuit Boards) are correctly packed.

Do not slide PCBs over any surface.

Always wear a wrist strap connected to ground when handling PCBs.

Not all components carry ESD warning labels. Nevertheless, always treat electronic components and units as if they were sensitive to electrostatic discharge. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 124 46-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev G, 2003-06-10 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 21 (28) 6 Rules and Requirements - Europe The BRU3 complies with the following directives:

EMC directive 89/336/EEC

Low voltage directive 73/232/EEC 6.1 General Safety Statements PORT VOLTAGE LEVELS In compliance with EN 41003, the safety status of the ports intended for the interconnection of other equipment are as follows:

Connector Status P1 - CONSOLE Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) P2 - ALARM Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) P3 - Telephone Telecomm. Network Voltage (TNV) P4 - RS232 Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) P5 - RS422B Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) The definition of SELV & TNV is stated in EN 60 950. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 124 46-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev G, 2003-06-10 22 (28) 6.2 BRU3 MANUAL Statements for Connection to Telephone Networks in the UK The equipment is approved by BABT as per the following standards:

NTR3

Connection to Public Switched Telephone Network.

The REN value of this equipment is 3.

Modem is using the following CCITT modulations: V.32bis, V.32, V.22bis, V.22. BS 6328 2 & 4-wire private leased lines. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 124 46-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev G, 2003-06-10

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 23 (28) 7 Rules and Requirements - USA/Canada 7.1 FCC - Rules and Requirements After the tests, the BRU3 has been classified as a Class B digital device by the Federal Communication Commission (FCC). Please note the following notices regarding classification, interference, changes or modifications, government requirements and equipment return valid for the BRU3. 7.2 BRU3 Classification The BRU3 has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. The BRU3 generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of the BRU3 in residential areas is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. 7.3 BRU3 Interference The BRU3 complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. TO USERS OF THE BRU3 IN CANADA:

The BRU3 does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set in the radio interference regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 124 46-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev G, 2003-06-10 24 (28) BRU3 MANUAL 7.4 BRU3 Changes or Modifications The authority to operate the BRU3 is conditioned by the requirement that no changes or modifications will be made to the BRU3 equipment unless the changes or modifications are expressly approved by Ericsson. 7.5 Government Requirements and Equipment Return Certain governments require that instructions pertaining to the BRU3 connection to the public switched telephone network be included in the installation and operation manual. Specific instructions are listed in the following sections. 7.5.1 USA Notice to users of the Public Switched Telephone Network 1. The BRU3 complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules. On the BRU3 is a label that contains, among other information, the FCC registration number and Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for the BRU3. The label is located on the BRU3 Case top cover, below the handle. If requested, this information must be provided to the telephone company. 2. 3. The Universal Service Order Codes (USOC) associated with the services on which the BRU3 is to be connected is RJ21X. The Canadian equivalent to the USOC is CA21A. The Ringer Equivalence (REN) is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected to the telephone line. Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but not all areas, the sum of the RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to the line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the telephone company to determine the maximum RENs for the calling area. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 124 46-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev G, 2003-06-10 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 25 (28) If the BRU3 causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But in advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a compliant with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make the necessary modifications in order to maintain uninterrupted service. If there are any problems with the BRU3, please contact your local Ericsson Customer Support representative or return the BRU3 equipment for repair to the following address:

Ericsson Radio Systems, Inc. Mobile Data Systems 710 Route 46 East Suite 300 Farfield, NJ 07004 USA Tel. (+1) 973 808 3156 Please package the equipment carefully for shipping, including a memo with necessary failure information. If the problem is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request you to remove the equipment from the network until the problem is resolved. The user is not authorized to repair or modify the equipment beyond that which is stated in the BRU3 manual. The BRU3 cannot be used on public coin service provided by the telephone company. Connection to Party Line Service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission or corporation commission for information. 9. The BRU3 is hearing-aid compatible. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 124 46-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev G, 2003-06-10 26 (28) BRU3 MANUAL 7.5.2 Canada Notice to the users of the Canadian Public Switched Telephone Network The Canadian Department of Communications (DOC) label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational and safety requirements. The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user's satisfaction. Before installing the BRU3, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The BRU3 must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. In some cases, the company's inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly (telephone extension cord). The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations. Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment. Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone line and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas. On the BRU3 is a label that contains the Load Number (LN) for the BRU3. The LN is assigned to each BRU3 and denotes the percentage of the total load to be connected to a telephone loop which is used by the device to prevent overloading. The termination on a loop may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the total of the LNs of all devices does not exceed 100. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 124 46-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev G, 2003-06-10 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 27 (28) If there are any problems with the BRU3, please contact your local Ericsson Customer representative or return the equipment for repair to the following address:

Ericsson Communications Canada 5255 Satellite Drive Mississauga, Ontario L4W 5E3, Canada Tel. (905)629-6700 Fax. (905)629-6707 Please package the equipment carefully for shipping, including a memo with necessary failure information. CAUTION!

Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 124 46-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev G, 2003-06-10 28 (28) BRU3 MANUAL 8 Electrical Safety 8.1 Safety Instructions The following Safety Instructions have to be observed when installing the BRU3:

1. For permanently connected equipment, a readily accessible circuit breaker must be incorporated in the fixed wiring. 2. Never install telephone wiring during a thunder storm. 3. Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations. 4. Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface. 5. Exercise caution when installing or modifying telephone lines. 6. Avoid using a telephone, other than a cordless type, during a thunder storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lighting. 7. Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 124 46-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev G, 2003-06-10

 

 

Safety Instructions Contents 1 Introduction ................................................................................................. 3 2 Safety Instructions ....................................................................................... 4 2.1 Definition of Expressions................................................................. 5 3 IT Power System ......................................................................................... 6 4 Precautions .................................................................................................. 7 4.1 High Voltage .................................................................................... 7 4.2 Grounding ........................................................................................ 7 4.3 RF Exposure Assessment by Calculation ........................................ 7 5 Poisonous Substances .................................................................................. 9 5.1 Nickel Cadmium (NiCd) .................................................................. 9 5.1.1 Locating and Removing the Battery Pack ............................ 9 5.2 Beryllium Oxide (BeO).................................................................. 11 5.2.1 Existence of Beryllium Oxide in BRU3 ............................. 11 5.2.2 Grade of Toxicity................................................................ 12 5.2.3 Symptoms of Poisoning ...................................................... 12 5.2.4 First Aid .............................................................................. 12 5.2.5 Handling Components Containing Beryllium Oxide.......... 12 5.2.6 End of Life Treatment......................................................... 13 5.2.7 Labels.................................................................................. 13 5.2.8 Locating and Removing the Beryllium Oxide Component 14 5.3 Electro Static Discharge (ESD)...................................................... 21 6 Rules and Requirements - Europe ............................................................. 22 6.1 General Safety Statements ............................................................. 22 6.2 Statements for Connection to Telephone Networks in the UK...... 23 7 Rules and Requirements - USA/Canada.................................................... 24 7.1 FCC - Rules and Requirements...................................................... 24 7.2 BRU3 Classification....................................................................... 24 7.3 BRU3 Interference ......................................................................... 24 7.4 BRU3 Changes or Modifications ................................................... 25 BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: b3saf_en Uen Rev PH1, 2003-10-20 BRU3 MANUAL 7.5 Government Requirements and Equipment Return ........................25 7.5.1 USA .....................................................................................25 7.5.2 Canada .................................................................................27 8 Electrical Safety .........................................................................................29 8.1 Safety Instructions ..........................................................................29 The contents of this document are subject to revision without notice due to continued progress in methodology, design and manufacturing. Ericsson shall have no liability for any errors or damages of any kind resulting from the use of this document. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: b3saf_en Uen Rev PH1, 2003-10-20 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 3 (30) 1 Introduction This section contains Safety Instructions for handling the MOBITEX Base Radio Unit 3 (BRU3) during installation and maintenance work. Please read the Safety Instructions before starting any kind of installation or maintenance work. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: b3saf_en Uen Rev PH1, 2003-10-20 4 (30) BRU3 MANUAL 2 Safety Instructions Note!

Reduce the risk of accidents by studying all the instructions carefully before starting work. If questions arise regarding the safety instructions, contact your supervisor or the local Ericsson company. Read and follow all warning notices and instructions found on the product or included in the BRU3 manual. Ericsson takes no responsibility if the labels have disappeared from a BRU3 due to accident or age. Where local regulations exist, these are to be followed. The safety information in this manual is a supplement to local regulations. It is the responsibility of the local project manager to make certain that local regulations are known and followed. The relevant manual (including this safety information) and specific instructions supplied by Ericsson must be followed in any work performed on the Ericsson products or systems. Sufficient knowledge of English or of any of the other languages in which the manuals or instructions are printed is necessary. The safety information in the relevant manuals presupposes that any person performing work on Ericsson products or systems has the necessary education, training and competence required in order to perform that work correctly. For certain work, additional training or special training may be required. For more precise information on the amount and content of the general and/or special training required for work on Ericsson products or systems, please contact the supervisor or the local Ericsson company. The BRU3 is intended to be used with a three-wire mains connection plug - a plug which has a grounding pin. This is a safety feature. Grounding of the BRU3 is vital to ensure safe operation. Do not defeat the purpose of the grounding type plug by modifying the plug or using an adapter. The slots and openings in the bottom of the BRU3 are provided for ventilation. To ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating, these slots and openings must not be blocked or covered. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: b3saf_en Uen Rev PH1, 2003-10-20 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 5 (30) Make sure that the FE Power Supply cable is not squeezed by anything and do not place the cable in such a way that there is a risk of people treading on it. General purpose cables are provided with the BRU3. The provision of special cables, which may be required by a regulatory inspection authority for the installation site, is the responsibility of the customer. When installed in the final configuration, the BRU3 must comply with the applicable safety standards and regulatory requirements of the country in which it is installed. If necessary, consult with the appropriate regulatory agencies and inspection authorities to ensure compliance. 2.1 Definition of Expressions The following definitions of hazard degree are used in this document:

DANGER!

Expresses a hazard that, if neglected, could be either fatal or cause life-long injuries to a human being, and/or destroy the equipment. WARNING!

Expresses a hazard that, if neglected, could cause severe injuries to a human being, and/or severe damage to the equipment. CAUTION!

Expresses a hazard that, if neglected, could cause injuries to a human being, or damage to equipment. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: b3saf_en Uen Rev PH1, 2003-10-20 6 (30) BRU3 MANUAL 3 IT Power System The BRU3 is not intended for use in an IT power distribution system. Type approval testing in accordance with EN60950, UL1950 and CSA 22.2 No. 950 has been performed excluding IT-systems. An IT power system is a power distribution system having no direct connection to earth, only the exposed conductive parts of the electrical installation are grounded. Figure 1 Example of an IT power system. Note!

For more details on IT power distribution systems and test procedures, please refer to the standard documents.

(Please note that IT Power distribution systems are not very widespread and the abbreviation should not be confused with the well-known abbreviation for Information Technology). BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: b3saf_en Uen Rev PH1, 2003-10-20 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 7 (30) 4 Precautions 4.1 High Voltage DANGER!

The BRU3 is powered by 120 or 230V AC. During normal operation, live terminals or components are not accessible. If the BRU3 front cover is opened during operation, for maintenance or commissioning purposes, live terminals or components are exposed. 4.2 Grounding DANGER!

Grounding must be done before the MAIN SWITCH on the FE Power Supply Unit (FPU) is switched on. Before operation of the BRU3, ensure that the BRU3 is grounded in accordance with the Installation Instructions. 4.3 RF Exposure Assessment by Calculation BRU3 base stations mounting instructions assume tower or roof mounting of the connected antenna(s). Relevant distances for RF exposure in practice exceed the range of the RF near-field range, thus MPE (not SAR) is addressed. TX maximum output power is 6 W (37.8 dBm) at 100% duty cycle. According to formula [1] below, power density at R=1 m distance is approximately 0.048 mW / cm2 << 0.6 mW / cm2, assuming unity gain isotropic antenna and ideal feed line (lossless). BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: b3saf_en Uen Rev PH1, 2003-10-20 8 (30) BRU3 MANUAL The product is marketed without antenna and it is to be installed by professional personnel. The installation manual contains a warning note requiring the installation responsible to maintain an antenna safety distance from general public to meet RF exposure limits, considering feeder loss and antenna gain in every case. Above example shows margin to the commissions exposure limit(1) in excess of 10 dB. Any installation using higher than 10 dB combined antenna gain and feeder loss arrangements and/or closer distances than 1 m to general public shall require the installation responsible to prove RF exposure performance of his installation meets applicable limits.

(1) Regulative reference: CFR 47, chapter 1, part 1, subpart I, item 1.1310, Radio frequency radiation exposure limits, table1 part (B) Limits for maximum permissible exposure Limits for general ppopulation, uncontrolled exposure Power density f [MHz] /1500 [mW / cm2] = 900 / 1500 = 0.6 [mW / cm2]

BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: b3saf_en Uen Rev PH1, 2003-10-20 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 9 (30) 5 Poisonous Substances 5.1 Nickel Cadmium (NiCd) WARNING!

The BRU3 contains a Nickel Cadmium battery pack.

Handle the battery pack with care. Do not expose it to fire or crush it; the battery pack may release toxic substances.

Do not short-circuit. The battery pack may cause burns.

There is danger of explosion if the battery pack is incorrectly replaced. Replace the battery pack with the same type recommended by Ericsson.

Return used batteries to Ericsson. In the future the label in Figure 2 will mark the metallic shield covering the battery pack inside the BRU3. Ni-Cd Cd Figure 2 This label is used to mark the battery pack. 5.1.1 Locating and Removing the Battery Pack Suitable tools:

A standard screwdriver CAUTION!

Before any part of the BRU3 is dismantled, all connections to power supply must be disconnected. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: b3saf_en Uen Rev PH1, 2003-10-20 10 (30) BRU3 MANUAL Refer to Figure 3 for the different parts of the BRU3:

1 = FE Case Bottom Frame (FBF) 2 = FE Power Supply Unit (FPU) 3 = FE Battery Unit (FBU) 4 = FE Mains Power Cable 3 A v e R 7 9 1 1 0 4 E Z L

2 8 8 2

4 2 1 2 4 Figure 3 Base Radio Unit 3 (BRU3) 1. Unlock and open the BRU3. 2. Unplug the FE Mains Power Cable from the FE Power Supply Unit (FPU), refer to Figure 3. 3. Set the BATTERY SWITCH on the FPU to position 0. 4. Disconnect the power supply cable from the FE Battery Unit (FBU) by pressing the snap-in and at the same time pulling out the cable connector, refer to A in Figure 4. 5. Unscrew the slot-headed screw holding the FBU to the FE Case Bottom Frame (FBF), refer to B in Figure 4. 6. Remove the FBU by lifting it straight up from the FBF. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: b3saf_en Uen Rev PH1, 2003-10-20 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 11 (30) A B A v e R 7 9 1 1 0 4 E Z L

2 8 8 2

6 1 Figure 4 Removal of the FE Battery Unit (FBU) 5.2 Beryllium Oxide (BeO) DANGER!

Study these instructions carefully before starting work with the BRU3 to reduce the risk of accidents. If questions arise regarding the safety instructions, contact the supervisor or the local Ericsson company. Follow existing local regulations. The safety information in this manual is only a supplement to local regulations. 5.2.1 Existence of Beryllium Oxide in BRU3 BRU3 for 400 MHz and 900 MHz may contain Beryllium Oxide. In the future non-toxic substances will be used instead of Beryllium Oxide. It is easy to decide which BRU3 contains Beryllium Oxide because of the warning labels outside and inside the BRU3. If the outside warning label has disappeared, open the BRU3 to make sure. If BRU3 contains Beryllium Oxide, it is found in small amounts in ceramic form in the power amplifier on the FE radio board (FRB). Note!

BRU3 for 800 MHz does not contain Beryllium Oxide. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: b3saf_en Uen Rev PH1, 2003-10-20 12 (30) BRU3 MANUAL 5.2.2 Grade of Toxicity Beryllium Oxide dust is very dangerous if inhaled, even for only a few seconds. It may cause injury to skin or mucous membranes severe enough to endanger life or cause permanent injury. Particles penetrating the skin through wounds or abrasions are liable to cause chronic ulcerations. If an FE radio board containing Beryllium Oxide has exploded, the site must be cleaned by authorized personnel, considering the rules and regulations of your country. Dust can also be created if the ceramic form is broken, chafed or filed. 5.2.3 Symptoms of Poisoning Symptoms of Beryllium Oxide poisoning are respiratory troubles or cyanosis

(grey-blue discoloration of the skin). These symptoms may develop within a week or after a period of several years. 5.2.4 First Aid Suspected inhalation of Beryllium Oxide must be treated immediately by a doctor at a hospital. Suspected skin contact with Beryllium Oxide or penetration of the skin through cuts or abrasions must be treated by thoroughly washing the area with water immediately. This should be followed by a medical examination. 5.2.5 Handling Components Containing Beryllium Oxide As long as Beryllium Oxide is encapsulated in its ceramic form it is safe to handle. The ceramic form must not be damaged in any way, for example, do not file, ground, scrape or treat the ceramic with acid or mechanically damage it in any way. Components containing Beryllium Oxide must be treated with special care:

Compressed air should not be used to clean units containing Beryllium Oxide.

Disused Beryllium Oxide components must be treated as environmentally hazardous waste. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: b3saf_en Uen Rev PH1, 2003-10-20 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 13 (30) If damaged components containing Beryllium Oxide leave dust or particles you must use a safety mask, eye protectors, protective gloves and protective clothing. Collect the dust and particles with wet rags and place the wet rags in plastic bags and seal thoroughly, and treat the rags as environmentally hazardous waste.

Dispose of defective or broken Beryllium Oxide components in approved containers, with tight-fitting capping. Mark them clearly on the outside of the wrapping: COMPONENTS CONTAIN BERYLLIUM OXIDE.

Never send the ceramic form containing Beryllium Oxide through the mail. Instead, return them to the nearest depot manually in person.

Beryllium Oxide must be transported to special waste handling. Instructions to remove the ceramic form containing Beryllium Oxide is to be found on the next page. 5.2.6 End of Life Treatment Before shredding the BRU3, the Beryllium Oxide Component must be removed for special treatment. This instruction describes how to remove it. The presence of components containing Beryllium Oxide is clearly marked, using the labels described below. 5.2.7 Labels There are different types of warning labels used for BRU3 containing Beryllium Oxide. Ericsson takes no responsibility if the labels have disappeared from a BRU3 due to accident or age. At least one the following labels are used. WARNING THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS COMPONENTS WITH BERYLLIUM OXIDE, THE DUST OF WHICH IS TOXIC. SEE USER MANUAL BEFORE SCRAPPING. Figure 5 This label is used outside the BRU3. Older BRU3 may not have it. User manual refers to this manual. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: b3saf_en Uen Rev PH1, 2003-10-20

14 (30) BRU3 MANUAL

BERYLLIUM OXIDE

(Toxic) used in the equipment. See Instruction book. Figure 6 This label is used inside the BRU3 containing beryllium oxide. In the future it should also be used on the lid of the bigger metallic cover on the FE Radio Board for 900 MHz. The FE Radio Board for 400 MHz does not have this extra cover. Instruction book refers to this manual. Poison BeO Figure 7 This label is used on the metallic lid covering the Beryllium Oxide Ceramic Component. 5.2.8 Locating and Removing the Beryllium Oxide Component Suitable tools:

A standard screwdriver

A TORX TX10 screwdriver

A pair of cutting pliers

A small adjustable spanner or an 8 mm spanner CAUTION!

Before any part of the BRU3 is dismantled, all connections to power supply must be disconnected. 1. Please read the whole section before taking any action. 2. Unlock and open the BRU3. The Beryllium Oxide component is included on the FE Radio Board. The FE Radio Board is underneath one of the filter modules, see Figure 8. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: b3saf_en Uen Rev PH1, 2003-10-20 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 15 (30) A v e R 7 9 1 1 0 4 E Z L

2 8 8 2

3 Figure 8 The FE Radio Board containing the Beryllium Oxide component is located underneath one of the filter modules. The BRU3 in the figure is used for 900 MHz. A BRU3 used for 400 MHz looks the same but has bigger filter modules and the cable kit between the lids is mounted between the filter modules instead. 3. Unscrew the four screws and loosen the cable kit between the lids to be able to remove the large black filters, as per Figure 9. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: b3saf_en Uen Rev PH1, 2003-10-20 16 (30) BRU3 MANUAL A v e R 7 9 1 1 0 4 E Z L

2 8 8 2

5 1 Figure 9 Removing four screws and a cable kit. 4. Unscrew all screws needed to remove the large metallic plate with the filter modules as per Figure 10. A v e R 7 9 1 1 0 4 E Z L

2 8 8 2

4 Figure 10 Removing filter modules with metallic plate. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: b3saf_en Uen Rev PH1, 2003-10-20 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 17 (30) 5. Locate the FE Radio Board, see Figure 11. A 4 0 0 0 0 4 R 7 9 9 5 W 0 8 R O A 1 1 7 2 0 1 5

2 A 4 0 R 2 G A v e R 7 9 1 1 0 4 E Z L

2 8 8 2

7 1 Figure 11 Locating the FE Radio Board in the FE Case Bottom Frame (FBF). The FE Radio Board is to the right in the figure. 6. Make sure that the FE Radio Board is undamaged. Do not work with the BRU3 if the FE Radio Board looks burned or damaged in any way. If this is the case close the BRU3 and treat the BRU3 as beryllium oxide hazardous waste. Note!

For a BRU3 used for 900 MHz proceed to step 10. For a BRU3 used for 400 MHz continue with the following steps. 7. Unscrew the two screws as per Figure 12. A v e R 7 9 1 1 0 4 E Z L

2 8 8 2

5 ROA 117 2015/2 A400004R79 95W08 R2G A40 Figure 12 Removing two screws. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: b3saf_en Uen Rev PH1, 2003-10-20 18 (30) BRU3 MANUAL 8. Lift off the loosened metallic cover. The Beryllium Oxide component is now visible. Cut the seven pins and the small metallic tongue as per Figure 13. A v e R 7 9 1 1 0 4 E Z L

2 8 8 2

6 ROA 117 2015/2 A400004R79 95W08 R2G A40 Figure 13 Locating the seven pins and the small metallic tongue to be cut off. 9. Remove the loosened Beryllium Oxide component by lifting it off as per Figure 14. A v e R 7 9 1 1 0 4 E Z L

2 8 8 2

7 ROA 117 2015/2 A400004R79 95W08 R2G A40 Figure 14 Removing the Beryllium Oxide component from the board. The component containing Beryllium Oxide is now removed. Steps 10 to 13 refer to BRU3 900 MHz only. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: b3saf_en Uen Rev PH1, 2003-10-20 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 19 (30) For BRU3 used for 900 MHz:

10. Remove the metallic cover as per Figure 15. A v e R 7 9 1 1 0 4 E Z L

2 8 8 2

8 Figure 15 Removing the metallic cover. 11. Unscrew the two screws as per Figure 16. A v e R 7 9 1 1 0 4 E Z L

2 8 8 2

9 Figure 16 Removing two screws. 12. Lift off the loosened metallic cover. The Beryllium Oxide component is now visible. Cut the four pins as per Figure 17. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: b3saf_en Uen Rev PH1, 2003-10-20 20 (30) BRU3 MANUAL A v e R 7 9 1 1 0 4 E Z L

2 8 8 2

0 1 Figure 17 Locating the four pins to be cut off. 13. Remove the loosened Beryllium Oxide component by lifting it off as per Figure 18. A v e R 7 9 1 1 0 4 E Z L

2 8 8 2

1 1 Figure 18 Removing the Beryllium Oxide component from the board. The component containing Beryllium Oxide is now removed. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: b3saf_en Uen Rev PH1, 2003-10-20 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 21 (30) 5.3 Electro Static Discharge (ESD) CAUTION!

All types of electronic components, particularly integrated circuits, are in some way sensitive to Electro Static Discharge (ESD). Damage caused by ESD is a common reason for faults in electronic equipment. The total operating time between failures can be extended considerably by avoiding ESD damage during installation and maintenance work. This has become more important as electronic components decrease in size and increase in sensitivity. The following ESD basic rules have to be followed when working with electronic components.

Avoid materials or clothes that easily create electrostatic charges.

Retain spare parts in their transport packaging until just before use.

Ensure that PCBs (Printed Circ uit Boards) are correctly packed.

Do not slide PCBs over any surface.

Always wear a wrist strap connected to ground when handling PCBs.

Not all components carry ESD warning labels. Nevertheless, always treat electronic components and units as if they were sensitive to electrostatic discharge. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: b3saf_en Uen Rev PH1, 2003-10-20 22 (30) BRU3 MANUAL 6 Rules and Requirements - Europe The BRU3 complies with the following directives:

EMC directive 89/336/EEC

Low voltage directive 73/232/EEC 6.1 General Safety Statements PORT VOLTAGE LEVELS In compliance with EN 41003, the safety status of the ports intended for the interconnection of other equipment are as follows:

Connector Status P1 - CONSOLE Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) P2 - ALARM Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) P3 - Telephone Telecomm. Network Voltage (TNV) P4 - RS232 Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) P5 - RS422B Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) The definition of SELV & TNV is stated in EN 60 950. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: b3saf_en Uen Rev PH1, 2003-10-20 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 23 (30) 6.2 Statements for Connection to Telephone Networks in the UK The equipment is approved by BABT as per the following standards:

NTR3

Connection to Public Switched Telephone Network.

The REN value of this equipment is 3.

Modem is using the following CCITT modulations: V.32bis, V.32, V.22bis, V.22. BS 6328 2 & 4-wire private leased lines. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: b3saf_en Uen Rev PH1, 2003-10-20

24 (30) BRU3 MANUAL 7 Rules and Requirements - USA/Canada 7.1 FCC - Rules and Requirements After the tests, the BRU3 has been classified as a Class B digital device by the Federal Communication Commission (FCC). Please note the following notices regarding classification, interference, changes or modifications, government requirements and equipment return valid for the BRU3. 7.2 BRU3 Classification The BRU3 has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. The BRU3 generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of the BRU3 in residential areas is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. 7.3 BRU3 Interference The BRU3 complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. TO USERS OF THE BRU3 IN CANADA:

The BRU3 does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set in the radio interference regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: b3saf_en Uen Rev PH1, 2003-10-20 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 25 (30) 7.4 BRU3 Changes or Modifications The authority to operate the BRU3 is conditioned by the requirement that no changes or modifications will be made to the BRU3 equipment unless the changes or modifications are expressly approved by Ericsson. 7.5 Government Requirements and Equipment Return Certain governments require that instructions pertaining to the BRU3 connection to the public switched telephone network be included in the installation and operation manual. Specific instructions are listed in the following sections. 7.5.1 USA Notice to users of the Public Switched Telephone Network 1. The BRU3 complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules. On the BRU3 is a label that contains, among other information, the FCC registration number and Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for the BRU3. The label is located on the BRU3 Case top cover, below the handle. If requested, this information must be provided to the telephone company. 2. 3. The Universal Service Order Codes (USOC) associated with the services on which the BRU3 is to be connected is RJ21X. The Canadian equivalent to the USOC is CA21A. The Ringer Equivalence (REN) is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected to the telephone line. Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but not all areas, the sum of the RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to the line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the telephone company to determine the maximum RENs for the calling area. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: b3saf_en Uen Rev PH1, 2003-10-20 26 (30) BRU3 MANUAL 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. If the BRU3 causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But in advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a compliant with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make the necessary modifications in order to maintain uninterrupted service. If there are any problems with the BRU3, please contact your local Ericsson Customer Support representative or return the BRU3 equipment for repair to the following address:

Ericsson Radio Systems, Inc. Mobile Data Systems 710 Route 46 East Suite 300 Farfield, NJ 07004 USA Tel. (+1) 973 808 3156 Please package the equipment carefully for shipping, including a memo with necessary failure information. If the problem is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request you to remove the equipment from the network until the problem is resolved. The user is not authorized to repair or modify the equipment beyond that which is stated in the BRU3 manual. The BRU3 cannot be used on public coin service provided by the telephone company. Connection to Party Line Service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission or corporation commission for information. 9. The BRU3 is hearing-aid compatible. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: b3saf_en Uen Rev PH1, 2003-10-20 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 27 (30) 7.5.2 Canada Notice to the users of the Canadian Public Switched Telephone Network The Canadian Department of Communications (DOC) label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational and safety requirements. The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user's satisfaction. Before installing the BRU3, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The BRU3 must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. In some cases, the company's inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly (telephone extension cord). The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations. Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment. Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone line and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas. On the BRU3 is a label that contains the Load Number (LN) for the BRU3. The LN is assigned to each BRU3 and denotes the percentage of the total load to be connected to a telephone loop which is used by the device to prevent overloading. The termination on a loop may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the total of the LNs of all devices does not exceed 100. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: b3saf_en Uen Rev PH1, 2003-10-20 28 (30) BRU3 MANUAL If there are any problems with the BRU3, please contact your local Ericsson Customer representative or return the equipment for repair to the following address:

Ericsson Communications Canada 5255 Satellite Drive Mississauga, Ontario L4W 5E3, Canada Tel. (905)629-6700 Fax. (905)629-6707 Please package the equipment carefully for shipping, including a memo with necessary failure information. CAUTION!

Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: b3saf_en Uen Rev PH1, 2003-10-20 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 29 (30) 8 Electrical Safety 8.1 Safety Instructions The following Safety Instructions have to be observed when installing the BRU3:

1. For permanently connected equipment, a readily accessible circuit breaker must be incorporated in the fixed wiring. 2. Never install telephone wiring during a thunder storm. 3. Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations. 4. Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface. 5. Exercise caution when installing or modifying telephone lines. 6. Avoid using a telephone, other than a cordless type, during a thunder storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lighting. 7. Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: b3saf_en Uen Rev PH1, 2003-10-20 30 (30) BRU3 MANUAL BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: b3saf_en Uen Rev PH1, 2003-10-20

 

 

BRU3 in the Mobitex Network Contents 1 The BRU3 in the Mobitex Network ............................................................ 3 1.1 The BRU3 as a Radio Station .......................................................... 4 1.2 The BRU3 as a Node........................................................................ 6 1.3 Data .................................................................................................. 6 1.4 Services and Users ........................................................................... 6 1.5 Data Rate.......................................................................................... 7 2 Network Layer............................................................................................. 8 2.1 Mobitex Packet Types...................................................................... 8 3 Link Layer ................................................................................................. 10 3.1 Radio Protocol................................................................................ 11 4 Frame Types .............................................................................................. 13 4.1 Radio Channel................................................................................ 15 4.1.1 System Channels................................................................. 15 4.1.2 Traffic Channels ................................................................. 15 5 Roaming .................................................................................................... 16 5.1 Channel Access Protocols .............................................................. 16 5.1.1 Base to Mobile .................................................................... 16 5.1.2 Mobile to Base .................................................................... 17 5.1.3 Repetition............................................................................ 18 5.1.4 Message Sequence Numbers .............................................. 19 5.2 Autonomous Operation .................................................................. 19 BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 155 19-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev E, 2003-03-18 BRU3 MANUAL The contents of this document are subject to revision without notice due to continued progress in methodology, design and manufacturing. Ericsson shall have no liability for any errors or damages of any kind resulting from the use of this document. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 155 19-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev E, 2003-03-18 BRU3 IN THE MOBITEX NETWORK 3 (20) 1 The BRU3 in the Mobitex Network The base radio unit 3 BRU3 provides cellular radio communication facilities in the Mobitex packet switching system. This radio channel enables data communication to be established with mobile terminals. The BRU3 also serves as a switching node in the network. The BRU3 is a one-channel node specified for installation when only one radio channel is required. This opening section examines network parameters which play a direct role in the operation of the base radio unit. If you are encountering Mobitex for the first time, you should first refer to the System Manual, which provides a comprehensive description of the Mobitex system. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 155 19-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev E, 2003-03-18 4 (20) BRU3 MANUAL 1.1 The BRU3 as a Radio Station In its role as a cellular radio base station, the BRU3 connects roaming mobile terminals to the Mobitex network by means of a trunked radio link. This trunked link allows a large number of terminals to be handled on the same radio channel. An overview of an simple Mobitex network is shown in Figure 1 Simple Mobitex network.. NCC MHX MOX FST FST FST MOX FST BAS BAS BAS BAS MOB MOB MOB 1/LZEA 801 256 R1 Figure 1 Simple Mobitex network. The BRU3 is equipped with one full duplex radio channel. The up frequency for the channel is used to transmit from mobile to base. The down frequency is used to transmit from base to mobile. The terms up and down traffic are used throughout this manual in this context. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 155 19-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev E, 2003-03-18 BRU3 IN THE MOBITEX NETWORK 5 (20) In data communication terms, the mobile can be seen as a special type of terminal, interfaced to the network by the Mobitex radio protocol. NETWORK LEVEL LINK LEVEL APPLIATION LAYERS HDLC or X.25 protocol Mobitex Radio Protocol To MOX Base station

Mobile terminal User HDLC/X25 Frame MPak Radio Frame MPak 19/LZEA 801 294 R1 Figure 2 The mobile-network interface. Mobitex mobile terminals are free to roam within the radio coverage area of radio base stations in the network. Within this area, a mobile selects a base station with which to communicate, on the basis of its received signal strength. This base station is known as the current base station for the mobile concerned, and the mobile is said to be roamed in to that base. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 155 19-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev E, 2003-03-18 6 (20) BRU3 MANUAL 1.2 The BRU3 as a Node When a base station connects a mobile terminal that is roamed in to a subscriber that is not roamed in to the same base station, the base station acts as an end node for the mobile. In this situation, packets sent by the mobile are routed through the minimum number of MOX and MHX network nodes, to the end node for the addressee. If the addressee is a fixed terminal, this will be a MOX. In the case of a mobile, it will be another base station. This second base station transmits the packets to the mobile terminal identified by the address contained in the packet. When connecting mobiles for which the base station is the current base station, it functions as the turn node for the connection, and no other part of the network is directly involved in the packet switching. 1.3 Data The BRU3 provides data connection. In the Mobitex network, data circuits are packet-switched over logical channels. The use of the word connect when describing data circuits in this manual does not imply a physical connection. 1.4 Services and Users Users for which the base station must provide services fall into two categories. There are Mobitex subscribers, who may use the system via fixed and/or mobile terminals. Then there are system requirements, demands made upon the base station by the network itself. Examples of these are the provision of hardware and software status information, and traffic data for billing purposes. Both subscribers and the system itself must therefore be seen as base station users. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 155 19-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev E, 2003-03-18 BRU3 IN THE MOBITEX NETWORK 7 (20) Mobile subscriptions may have access to some or all of the following traffic types:

Send TEXT/DATA

Receive TEXT/DATA

Send STATUS

Receive STATUS

Generate EMERGENCY

GROUP messages

Mailbox 1.5 Data Rate The BRU3 can handle a data rate of 8 kbps. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 155 19-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev E, 2003-03-18 8 (20) BRU3 MANUAL 2 Network Layer There is no end-to-end protocol between users in Mobitex at network level. Instead, the network service is supported by negative acknowledgement. If a packet is not delivered, it is returned to the sender with a status message. A packet may be left in the mail box, if this service is included in the subscription. 2.1 Mobitex Packet Types Within the Mobitex network, data is sent in the form of Mobitex packets. There are four types of Mobitex packets. TEXT packets

- Coded in ASCII format

- Maximum size 512 characters of user data per packet

- Application-independent. DATA packets Information not restricted to ASCII code

- Maximum size 512 octets of user information per packet

- Freely coded by individual applications. STATUS packets

- One single octet of numerical code between 0 and 255

- Each code number normally associated with a string of characters

- Coding chosen by the subscriber

- Used to reduce transfer time and costs. HPDATA packets

- Higher protocol data for messages which exceed the maximum size for text and data messages.

- Transport layer transfers the HPDATA message as several sub-messages.

- Contains information to indicate the type of protocol.

- Mobitex or user-defined protocols. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 155 19-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev E, 2003-03-18 BRU3 IN THE MOBITEX NETWORK 9 (20) An outline of the general Mobitex packet format is shown in Figure 3 General format of a Mobitex packet.. Note that the sender is recorded in the packet. This ensures that this information remains available after frame headers have been stripped off during signal processing, in the event the packet has to be returned. Sender Addressee

Packet type Optional distribution list Information part

( * )Control flags and Traffic status information 20/LZEA 801 294 Figure 3 General format of a Mobitex packet. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 155 19-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev E, 2003-03-18 10 (20) BRU3 MANUAL 3 Link Layer Mobitex packets are sent over each link in the network in the form of link level frames. Two types of external links are relevant to the radio base station: the MOX-base line link and the base-mobile radio link. For the MOX-base link the BRU3 can be configured for the HDLC (UNC 12) and/or the X.25 (CCITT Rec 1984) protocol, according to the operator's requirements. A special type of frame is used for the base-mobile radio link, which is described further on in this document. The structure of the link frame varies according to the protocol in use, X.25 or HDLC. The general format of an HDLC link level frame is shown in Figure 4 General format of an HDLC link frame.. Flags are sent at the start and end of frames to synchronize the protocol. The FCS field provides a frame checksum for error detection purposes. The control field specifies the frame type as unnumbered, supervisory or information. Flag Addr Ctrl MPAK FCS Flag 11/LZEA 801 294 R1 Figure 4 General format of an HDLC link frame. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 155 19-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev E, 2003-03-18 BRU3 IN THE MOBITEX NETWORK 11 (20) 3.1 Radio Protocol Data communication between the base station and mobile terminals is in accordance with the Mobitex radio protocol, which functions at physical and link layers. Modulation, demodulation and synchronization are carried out at the physical layer. The link layer contains functions for channel-coding, error detection and correction, selective automatic request and channel access control. Data is sent in the form of 8 kbps Mobitex radio frames. The general format of an 8 kbps radio frame is shown in Figure 5 General format of an 8 kbps

<MRM>frame.. The frame is split into blocks, each of which is coded for error detection. The frame head functions at physical layer to establish data synchronization. It includes the base identity and a set of control flags. The primary block contains the address of the mobile terminal and some control information. The network layer information is put in the following blocks, the number being defined by the amount of information to be transferred. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 155 19-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev E, 2003-03-18 12 (20) BRU3 MANUAL BIT SYNC FRAME SYNC FRAME HEAD 56 bits BASE AREA ID FLAGS PARITY MOB TYPE OCTET SEQUENCE BLOCK PRIMARY BLOCK 160 BITS TYPE=<MRM>

INFO PARITY INFO PARITY INFO O...O PARITY 21/LZEA 801 294 R1 SUBSEQUENT BLOCK 1 160 bits SUBSEQUENT BLOCK 2 160 bits Figure 5 General format of an 8 kbps <MRM>frame. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 155 19-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev E, 2003-03-18 BRU3 IN THE MOBITEX NETWORK 13 (20) 4 Frame Types There are 21 different 8 kbps radio frame types:

Name Label Sent By B M Function M frame Acknowledgement

<MRM> Y

<ACK> Y Negative acknowledge

<NAK> Y Repetition request Repetition reply

<REB> Y

<RES> Y Access request data

<ABD> N Access request speech

<ABT> N Access request emergency <ABL> N Access permission data

<ATD> Y Access permission speech <ATT> Y Access permission emergency

<ATL> Y Change channel data

<BKD> Y Change channel speech

<BKT> Y Free signal Sweep signal Silence order

<FRI>

Y

<SVP> Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N N N Transfers MPAK messages. Acknowledges correctly received frame. Req repeat of entire <MRM>. Req repeat of bad blocks <MRM> or <RES>. The reply to <REB>. Req to send <MRM> that exceeds max access. Request to send <MRM> that exceeds max_speech. Req to send emergency <MRM>, whose length exceeds max_access emergency. Reply to <ABD> when base is ready. Reply to <ABT> when base is ready. Reply to <ABL> when base is ready. Orders mobile to another channel for data. Orders mobile to another channel for speech. Marks start of 'free' channel access cycle. Marks start of sweep cycle.

<TST> Y N Withdraws access permission during 'free'. Activity request

<AKT> Y Access denied speech

<NAT> Y Change base station speech

<BBT> Y Wait for channel speech

<VKT> Y Cancel access request speech

<AAT> N N N N N Y Asks mobile to confirm active with <ACK>. Tells mobile connection cannot be provided. Transfers call to another base station. Reply to <ABT> if mobile is placed in queue. Sent by mobile to end speech session. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 155 19-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev E, 2003-03-18 14 (20) BRU3 MANUAL FRAME HEAD BASID The base PRIMARY BLOCK TMAN The mobile ADDRESSEE SENDER

. SUBSEQUENT BLOCKS MPAK header MPAK Figure 6 Addressing a mobile terminal. SENDER:

Terminal subscr. Personal subscr. ADDRESSEE:

Terminal subscr. Personal subscr. Group 22/LZEA 801 294 R1 BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 155 19-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev E, 2003-03-18 BRU3 IN THE MOBITEX NETWORK 15 (20) 4.1 Radio Channel The BRU3 provides data communication with roaming mobiles in its coverage area on one full duplex radio channel. The duplex transmitter and receiver frequencies are completely independent of one another. The BRU3 uses one of the two different channel types: System channels and Traffic channels. 4.1.1 System Channels Every radio base station has at least one system channel. This duplex channel is used to carry system signals between the radio base station and all mobiles. These system signals control and configure the base-mobile link, and include the periodic <SVP> and <FRI> signals which contain the parameters for roaming and channel access algorithm control. An active mobile not currently sending or receiving traffic constantly monitors the system channels from all base stations in its current list, to implement the roaming protocol. It also listens for signals from its current base which carry its address. Signals on this channel may be system messages or data traffic, and may be initiated by a base station or mobile. 4.1.2 Traffic Channels These channels carry data traffic not carried on the system channel. A traffic channel is brought into use when traffic levels require additional capacity. System channel BAS 1:____________________________________ System channel BAS 3:____________________________________ System channel BAS 4:____________________________________ Current base = BAS 2 t t t t SVP SCAN-TIME SVP Evaluation The mobile terminal monitors Current base Other system channels Current base 23/LZEA 801 294 R1 Figure 7 System channel monitoring. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 155 19-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev E, 2003-03-18 16 (20) BRU3 MANUAL 5 Roaming Each mobile terminal contains data about the base stations within the range of its roaming area. Each base station contains a subscription register which contains details of the mobiles currently roamed in. Mobiles continuously evaluate the roaming signals that are transmitted periodically from all base stations on separate system channels, as shown in Figure 7 System channel monitoring.. Each roaming signal contains the base identification number. The mobile decides which base station to use on the basis of the average received signal strength. When a mobile decides to change to a different base station, it transmits a roaming message to the new base. The subscription register there is updated from the superior MOX with the mobile terminal's subscription data. A message is sent from the new base station to the previous base station, to delete this data from its subscription register. The superior MHX keeps track of all mobiles roamed in to base stations within its arm of the network. If a mobile roams in to a base station under a different arm, subscription data for the mobile is downloaded to base stations in the new area from the superior MHX and MOX. Should a base station lose its subscription data, for example through equipment failure, this data can be downloaded to the relevant base station at any time. 5.1 Channel Access Protocols To ensure that the radio channel can be shared by a large number of mobiles, a channel access protocol is imposed on mobiles from the base station. 5.1.1 Base to Mobile A mobile terminal with no traffic to send monitors the system channel of its current base station. Traffic for the mobile is first sent on the system channel, either in the form of a complete message or as a channel change order. If a channel change order is sent, the message is transmitted on the new channel. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 155 19-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev E, 2003-03-18 BRU3 IN THE MOBITEX NETWORK 17 (20) 5.1.2 Mobile to Base To minimize the risk of collisions between mobiles attempting to send on the system channel at the same time, an access method using time slots is used. This ensures that a mobile can only send traffic when access to the channel is granted. The method is based on the slotted ALOHA algorithm. On the system channel, the base station periodically transmits a cycle during which time-slots are made available to mobiles with traffic to send. The base station indicates the start of a cycle by transmitting a <FRI> signal. The free cycle which follows is divided into slots of equal length. The total number of slots, and the length of a single slot, is stated in the <FRI> signal. Traffic initiated by a mobile before the start of a free cycle is allocated one of the random slots that immediately follow the <FRI> signal. This is done by a random number generator which selects one of the random slots defined in the <FRI> signal. Transmission from the mobile begins at the start of the random slot. SLOT LENGTH FRI Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 6

. . Slot n FRI t t+T t+2T FRI SLOTS RAND SLOTS

<FRI>

Specifies parameters 7/LZEA 801 268 R2 Figure 8 Free signalling. Traffic initiated during the free cycle is allocated the next free slot, a procedure which also ensures random allocation of the available slots. The size of the slots matches the max_access parameter in the free signal. If the number of blocks in a packet is less than or equal to the number stated in max_access, it will fit in a slot. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 155 19-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev E, 2003-03-18 18 (20) BRU3 MANUAL Packets containing more blocks cannot be transmitted in a slot. The mobile then has to send an access request in a slot and wait for the base to send a access permission, before sending the packet. The number of slots in the free signal depends on the available down-traffic. While the base station is sending down-traffic on the down frequency, it simultaneously receives mobile transmissions on the up frequency. In this way, channel utilization is optimized on both channels.

< FRI ><

MRM2

><ATD3><ACK1>

<ACK3>

<FRI> BASE

<MRM1>

<ABD3>

<ACK2>< MRM3 >

MOB Figure 9 Channel access protocol. LZEA 801 304 R1 When all sessions initiated by the last free signal are terminated, i.e., all access requests have been served and all MRM packets have been acknowledged, it is time to send a new free signal. 5.1.3 Repetition A message from a mobile that is not acknowledged by the base station before the next <FRI > signal, is repeated by the mobile. The maximum number of repetitions allowed before a transmission is regarded as failed, is stated in the

<SVP> signal, and is defined by the network operator. With down traffic, if the base station receives no response from a mobile terminal within a certain time limit, the entire message is repeated. The maximum number of repetitions allowed before the transmission is regarded as failed is defined by the network operator. If a mobile or base station detects, by a checksum calculation, that one or more of the received blocks is incorrect and cannot be corrected, it requests a repetition of the corrupted blocks. These repetitions are requested until a correct message has been received and acknowledged. If the total number of blocks in the message is three or less, the complete frame is repeated. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 155 19-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev E, 2003-03-18 BRU3 IN THE MOBITEX NETWORK 19 (20) 5.1.4 Message Sequence Numbers Each up or down message, a complete frame, is given a sequential number (0 -

15) by the sender. If the same sequence number is received in successive messages, the second message is deleted by the receiver. This ensures that a message repeated because the sender has failed to detect an acknowledgement is not presented more than once at the receiver. Some typical base-mobile exchanges are shown in Figure 9 Channel access protocol.. 5.2 Autonomous Operation If contact between a base station and the superior MOX is lost, the base station operates autonomously. This allows the base station to continue operating as a turn node when both mobiles in an exchange are roamed in to the same base. The time period a radio base station works in autonomous mode can be limited by the operator. This, however, requires the license Shutdown of Autonomous Base Station. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 155 19-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev E, 2003-03-18 20 (20) BRU3 MANUAL BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 155 19-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev E, 2003-03-18

 

 

FBTEST Reference Manual Contents 1 Introduction ................................................................................................. 3 1.1 Field of Application ......................................................................... 3 1.2 Date and Time Window ................................................................... 4 1.3 FBTEST Menu Overview ................................................................ 5 2 Installation Procedures ................................................................................ 9 3 Hardware, Equipment and Preparation...................................................... 10 3.1 Configuration ................................................................................. 10 3.2 External Tests requiring External Hardware.................................. 11 3.3 Start of FBTEST ............................................................................ 11 4 FBTEST User Modes ................................................................................ 12 5 User Interface Description......................................................................... 13 5.1 Working with Menus...................................................................... 13 5.1.1 Toggling Function............................................................... 13 5.1.2 Menu Displays .................................................................... 14 6 Main Menu ................................................................................................ 15 6.1 Board Test Menu............................................................................ 17 6.1.1 Alt. 1: Do the Test............................................................... 18 6.1.2 Alt. 2: Number of Test Cycles ............................................ 18 6.1.3 Alt. 3: Select/Unselect Boards ............................................ 19 6.1.4 Alt. 4: Select Extended Test ............................................... 20 6.1.5 Alt. 5: Select Medium Test ................................................. 20 6.1.6 Alt. 6: Unselect all Tests..................................................... 20 6.1.7 Alt. 7-11: Sets the Test Parameters for Each Board ........... 20 6.1.8 Alt.7: Set Parameters for FCB FE Computer Board........ 21 6.1.9 Alt. 8: Set Parameters for FRB FE Radio Board ............. 22 6.1.10 Alt. 9: Set Parameters for FNB FE Connection Board .... 23 6.1.11 Alt. 10: Set Parameters for FMB FE Modem Board ....... 24 6.1.12 Alt. 11: Set Params for FPB FE Power Supply Board..... 25 6.1.13 Alt.12: Look at Test Results ............................................... 26 BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 BRU3 MANUAL 6.2 Set Time ..........................................................................................29 6.3 Radio Operations ............................................................................30 6.3.1 Radio Control and Calibration Menu ..................................30 6.3.2 Transceiver Setup Menu......................................................32 6.4 Measurement Setup Menu ..............................................................37 6.4.1 Transceiver Control and Presentation Menu .......................39 6.4.2 Radio Calibration Menu ......................................................42 6.4.3 Bandgap Calibration ............................................................44 6.4.4 Temperature Sensor Calibration..........................................46 6.4.5 Reference Oscillator OCXO Calibration.............................48 PF Output Power Calibration ..............................................51 6.4.6 6.4.7 PR Reflected Power Calibration .........................................54 6.4.8 VCO Modulation Calibration ..............................................57 6.4.9 TCXO Modulation Calibration............................................61 6.4.10 RSSI Calibration..................................................................65 6.4.11 EEPROM Display Editor Menu ..........................................67 6.4.12 Radio Register Editor Menu ................................................71 6.4.13 Adjustment ..........................................................................72 6.4.14 SETUP.................................................................................75 6.5 Modem Operation Menu.................................................................77 6.6 Status Overview Menu....................................................................78 6.7 Edit Loader Parameters Menu ........................................................79 6.7.1 Ports .....................................................................................81 6.7.2 Channels ..............................................................................89 6.7.3 Connections .........................................................................92 6.7.4 Read Parameters from FLASH............................................94 Store Parameters in FLASH ................................................95 6.7.5 7 Index...........................................................................................................96 7.1 Menu Index .....................................................................................98 The contents of this document are subject to revision without notice due to continued progress in methodology, design and manufacturing. Ericsson shall have no liability for any errors or damages of any kind resulting from the use of this document. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 FBTEST REFERENCE MANUAL 3 (102) 1 Introduction FBTEST is a test program for the Base Radio Unit 3 - BRU3. Two types of user interfaces are available through a serial communication port. One by a menu-

oriented structure where test alternatives and parameters are selected by stepping through the menus. The other interface is by command frame input, suitable for automatic testing with computer supervision over a communication line. In this case, the command frame syntax is the user interface. This is not described in this document. The test program is operated using a console terminal, connected to the BRU3, on which the result is displayed. A negative test result indicates a hardware fault, but a positive test result does not guarantee that the hardware is OK. It is not possible to test everything with this test program. 1.1 Field of Application There are four main applications for the FBTEST:

Acceptance control of the BRU3 hardware

Validating a new node

Trouble-shooting an existing node

Set up of node specific Loader parameters. The FBTEST Reference Manual covers both the procedures required when calibrating the BRU3s components at the factory, and the on-site installation and commissioning procedures for the BRU3. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 4 (102) BRU3 MANUAL The information applicable when commissioning shall take place is described in the following sections:

Set System Clock Menu

Radio Control and Calibration Menu, alternatives 1-3

Status Overview Menu

Modem Operation Menu

Edit Loader Parameters Menu 1.2 Date and Time Window The date and time window in the upper right-hand corner shows the system clock, marked with SYS:. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 FBTEST REFERENCE MANUAL 5 (102) 1.3 FBTEST Menu Overview Main Menu

----Board Test Menu

--------Do the test

--------Number of Test Cycles

--------Select/Unselect Boards Menu

--------Select Extended Test

--------Select Medium Test

--------Unselect all Tests

--------Set Test Parameters for FCB Menu

--------Set Test Parameters for FRB Menu

--------Set Test Parameters for FNB Menu

--------Set Test Parameters for FMB Menu

--------Set Test Parameters for FPB Menu

--------Look at Test Results Menu

----Set Time Menu

----Radio Control and Calibration Menu

--------Transceiver Setup Menu

-------------Radio Setup

-------------Select Number or Frequency Mode

------------------Number Mode Menu

-----------------------Set TX Channel Number

-----------------------Set TX Power

-----------------------Set TX Modulation

-----------------------Set RX Channel Number

-----------------------Set Low Output Power Alarm Limit

-----------------------Set VSWR Alarm Limit

------------------Frequency Mode Menu

-----------------------Set TX Channel Frequency

-----------------------Set TX Power

-----------------------Set TX Modulation

-----------------------Set RX Channel Frequency

-----------------------Set Low Output Power Alarm Limit

-----------------------Set VSWR Alarm Limit BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 16 18 19 19 20 21 21 21 22 23 24 25 26 28 30 31 33 33 33 34 34 34 34 35 35 35 36 36 36 37 37 37 37 6 (102) BRU3 MANUAL 38

--------Measurement Setup Menu 38

-------------Select Transmitter ON/OFF 39

-------------Save Test Data at Stop 39

-------------Set Test Time 40

--------Transceiver Control and Presentation Menu 40

-------------Select Transmitter ON/OFF 40

-------------Select Modulation ON/OFF 41

-------------Save Test Data at Stop 41

-------------Set Test Time 41

-------------Start 41

-------------Look at previous data 43

--------Radio Calibration Menu 45

-------------Bandgap Calibration Menu 45

------------------Increment 45

------------------Decrement 46

------------------Set Value 46

------------------Mark for Storage in EEPROM 47

-------------Temperature Sensor Calibration Menu 48

------------------Enter Temp. Index T1-T5 for Offset/Abs. Mode 48

------------------Enter Calibration Value for Offset/Abs. Mode 48

------------------Mark for Storage in EEPROM 49

-------------Reference Oscillator OCXO Calibration Menu 50

------------------Enter Temp. Ind. for OCXO in Offs./Abs. Mode 50

------------------Increment 50

------------------Decrement 51

------------------Set Value 51

------------------Mark for Storage in EEPROM 51

------------------Select Transmitter ON/OFF 52

-------------PF Output Power Calibration Menu

------------------Enter TX Power or PF Index P1-P8 for Offset/Abs. Mode 53 54

------------------Enter Temp. Index for PF in Offset/Abs. Mode 54

------------------Increment

------------------Decrement 54 54

------------------Set Value 54

------------------Mark for Storage in EEPROM

------------------Select Transmitter ON/OFF 54 BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 FBTEST REFERENCE MANUAL 7 (102)

-------------PR Reflected Power Calibration Menu

------------------Select TX Power Ind. P1-P8 for Offs./Abs.Mode

------------------Enter Temp. Index T1-T5 for Offset/Abs. Mode

------------------Read and enter Calibr. Value for Offset Mode

------------------Mark for Storage in EEPROM

------------------Select Transmitter ON/OFF

------------------Slot Number

------------------Attenuation

-------------VCO Modulation Calibration Menu

------------------Enter Temp. Index T -T5 for Offset/Abs. Mode

------------------Increment

------------------Decrement

------------------Set Value

------------------Mark for Storage in EEPROM

------------------Select Transmitter ON/OFF

------------------Select Modulation

------------------Select Modulation ON/OFF

------------------Select Slot

------------------Select Slot Channel

-------------TCXO Modulation Calibration Menu

------------------Enter Temp. Index T1-T5 for Offset/Abs. Mode

------------------Increment

------------------Decrement

------------------Set Value

------------------Mark for Storage in EEPROM

------------------Select Transmitter ON/OFF

------------------Select Modulation

------------------Select Modulation ON/OFF

------------------VCO Modulation ON/OFF

-------------RSSI Calibration Menu

------------------Select RSSI Index S1-S10 for Offset/Abs. Mode

------------------Read and Enter Calibration Value

------------------Mark for Storage in EEPROM

-------------EEPROM Display Editor Menu

------------------Select Screen 1

------------------Select Screen 2

------------------Select Screen 3

------------------Select Screen 4

-------------Save Calibration in EEPROM BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 55 56 56 56 57 57 57 57 58 59 59 60 60 60 60 60 60 61 61 62 64 64 64 64 64 64 65 65 65 66 67 67 67 68 68 69 70 71 44 8 (102) BRU3 MANUAL

-------------Setup Radio Operation Parameters

-------------PA Bias and FDAC Calibration Menu

------------------PA Bias Driver

------------------PA Bias Final

------------------FDAC Rx

------------------FDAC Tx

------------------Setup Radio Operation Parameters

------------------Set Transmitter On/Off

--------Radio Register Editor Menu

-------------Read Radio Register

-------------Write Radio Register

--------Adjustment Menu

-------------OCXO Age Adjustment Menu

------------------Increment

------------------Decrement

------------------Set Value

------------------Mark for Storage in EEPROM

-------------Save Adjustment in EEPROM

--------Setup Menu

-------------Frequency Band

-------------Channel Spacing

-------------Radio Board ROA

-------------Default TX Channel Number

-------------Default RX Channel Number

-------------Load and Save Default Calibration Data

-------------Save Parameter in Physical EEPROM

----Modem Operation Menu

--------Line Speed on Modem Port

--------DTR Status

--------RTS Status

--------Transparent Mode Access

----Status Overview Menu

----Edit Loader Parameters Menu

--------Node 0

--------Ports Menu

-------------Port

-------------Unit Number

-------------Local Port Number 44 72 72 72 72 72 73 73 74 74 74 75 76 76 76 76 77 75 78 78 78 79 79 79 79 79 80 80 80 80 80 81 82 82 84 84 85 86 BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 FBTEST REFERENCE MANUAL 9 (102)

-------------Modem Parameter Menu

------------------Modem in use

------------------Control Type

------------------Prompt

------------------Bit rate

------------------Dial Timeout

------------------Answer Timeout

------------------Init Commands Menu

----------------- Dial Commands Menu

-------------X.25 Parameters Menu

--------Channels Menu

-------------X.25 Parameters Menu

--------Connections Menu

--------Read Parameters from FLASH Menu

--------Store Parameters to FLASH Menu 87 87 87 87 88 88 88 89 90 91 92 94 95 97 98 BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 10 (102) BRU3 MANUAL 2 Installation Procedures Load FBTEST by using ZMODEM during the procedure of installing the BRU3 software. For details, refer to SW Commissioning Procedure in the Software Commissioning Procedure section of the Node SW - Installation and Commissioning module. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 FBTEST REFERENCE MANUAL 11 (102) 3 Hardware, Equipment and Preparation The preparation work necessary for testing a node is kept at a minimum. A console terminal has to be attached to the Console Connector on the BRU3, and if a test that requires external hardware is to be executed, special test cables are to be connected. 3.1 Configuration All terminal inputs and outputs are directed to the console. The console should be a VT100 terminal or the equivalent. The communication parameters should be as follows:

Baud rate 9600. 8 data bits. no parity. Most VT100-compatible terminals feature dumping the screen information to a hardcopy device, which may be very useful when logging the results from the tests. See the documentation of the actual terminal for more information. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06

12 (102) BRU3 MANUAL 3.2 External Tests requiring External Hardware Some of the external tests require external hardware. The external tests in question are:

Loopback Test of FNB Board

RFTL Test of FRB Board

Modem Tests A Loopback test is carried out of the FNB Board by using a 25 pin D-Sub plug. One of the physical ports is selected according to strapping alternative RS232 or RS422. An RFTL test is carried out of the FRB Board by using an external radio instrument. A predefined bit stream (Tx-signal) is transmitted from the BRU3 to the RFTL-adapted instrument, where the signal is measured and retransmitted as an RX-signal back to the BRU3. A bit error count is carried out by comparing the signals. One modem test is carried out requiring a test modem and a connection cable to the BRU3s line port. 3.3 Start of FBTEST At the BOOT command prompt CMD>, type TE and then press <RETURN>. The FBTEST program will be loaded and the Main Menu will be displayed ready to accept commands from the user. To execute the command frame mode of FBTEST, set the SW2 dip switch on the FCB-board in the following position: SW2:4 (OEM-Strap) to Open. For more information, please refer to FE Computer Board - FCB in the Mechanical Design section and to Modem Equipment in the BRU3 Logic and Radio Units section, both in the BRU3 - Functional Description module. When the OEM-Strap is set to Open, BOOT will automatically start FBTEST, and FBTEST will automatically start its command frame mode. This procedure is not described in this document. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 FBTEST REFERENCE MANUAL 13 (102) 4 FBTEST User Modes FBTEST can be executed in two different user modes. One mode is implemented with menus while the other mode involves the use of a command frame protocol. The menu mode is interactive and the selected test is executed after set up of its parameters. The command frame mode is designed to allow control of execution from an external computer. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 14 (102) BRU3 MANUAL 5 User Interface Description This section describes all the menus that are used in the FBTEST. When the FBTEST program is loaded and started, the Main Menu is displayed on the console terminal. The program is then ready to accept commands. 5.1 Working with Menus The user interface is quite straight-forward but the following must be noted:

To choose a menu alternative:

Write the corresponding number and press <RETURN>.

To change any number:

Write the number and press <RETURN>. If the number has to be entered in hexadecimal form, write 16#nnnnnnnn#, where nnnnnnnn is the hexadecimal value, e.g. 8A hex is entered as 16#8A#.

When a batch test is running:

You can stop the test by pressing the Q key (<RETURN>). The test will stop when the current test cycle is completed, which may take up to several minutes.

To temporary stop the printing on the screen:

<CTRL>S prevents scrolling

<CTRL>Q resumes printing. 5.1.1 Toggling Function Many menu alternatives are prefixed with a + or a -.

+ Active

- the test will be executed or this board will be tested.

Inactive - the test will not be executed or this board will not be tested. By selecting the number of such a menu alternative, the prefix will toggle. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 FBTEST REFERENCE MANUAL 15 (102) 5.1.2 Menu Displays For the various menu examples shown in this document the respective paths, i.e., the hierarchic structure is indicated, to facilitate the selection of the desired menus. See the example below:

[Main menu, Radio Operations, Calibration]

BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 16 (102) BRU3 MANUAL 6 Main Menu When the FBTEST program is started, the Main Menu is displayed on the screen, see Figure 1 Main menu.. Depending on selected alternative, different submenus will be displayed, as described below the figure.

[Main menu]

Figure 1 Main menu. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 FBTEST REFERENCE MANUAL 17 (102) The selected alternative will display other menus as follows:

Alt. 1 BOARD TEST Displays the Board Test menu, Figure 2. Alt. 2 SET TIME Displays the Set System Clock menu, Figure 11. Alt. 3 RADIO OPERATIONS Displays the Radio Control and Calibration menu, Figure 12. Alt. 4 MODEM OPERATIONS Displays the Modem Operation menu, Figure 41. Alt. 5 STATUS OVERVIEW Displays the Status Overview menu, Figure 42. Alt. 6 EDIT LOADER PARAMETERS Displays the Edit Loader Parameters, Figure 43. Using the Exit alternative exists the FBTEST program and the BRU3 will be restarted. The second line from the top of the screen tells the user which test selection has been chosen. The test alternatives are Medium, Extended, No-tests or User-

defined. Medium is default. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 18 (102) BRU3 MANUAL 6.1 Board Test Menu This menu is shown if alternative 1, Board Test, is selected in the Main Menu. From this menu, all tests can be configured and executed. The batch test sequence for each board type is chosen from the different board type menus, and so are all the interactive tests. Figure 2 Board Test menu. shows the Board Test Menu.

[Main menu, Board test]

Board Test menu SYS:yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm Current test selection is MEDIUM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Do the test Number of test cycles (0=Forever) Select/unselect boards Select extended test (External HW needed) Select medium test Unselect all tests Set test parameters for FCB Set test parameters for FRB Set test parameters for FNB Set test parameters for FMB Set test parameters for FPB Look at test results 0. Main menu Choose alternative:

Figure 2 Board Test menu. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 FBTEST REFERENCE MANUAL 19 (102) 6.1.1 Alt. 1: Do the Test This alternative starts the batch test which will execute all selected tests on all selected boards. The tests is defined by:

number of cycles type of board test mode (extended, medium userdefined) selected boards selected tests for each board 6.1.2 Alt. 2: Number of Test Cycles This alternative will display the question Number of cycles: (1). Accordingly, the default value is 1. The alternative specifies how many cycles a batch test will execute. Legal values are 1-999 or 0. The value 0 means an indefinite test loop, which can be manually stopped by entering Q. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06

20 (102) BRU3 MANUAL 6.1.3 Alt. 3: Select/Unselect Boards Displays a submenu, where all boards can be selected or unselected, and included in or excluded from the test by using the toggle function. Figure 3 Example of select/unselect menu. gives an example of this menu.

[Main menu, Board Test, Select/Unselect Boards]

Select/unselect boards SYS:yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm Current test selection is MEDIUM Comment 1

2 +

3 +

4 +

5 +

Board type FCB FRB FNB FMB FPB 0. Board Test menu Choose alternative:

Figure 3 Example of select/unselect menu. Alt. 1 - 5 A toggle function between + (select) and - (unselect) is used to include boards in or exclude boards from the test. Note!

+ = select

- = unselect BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 FBTEST REFERENCE MANUAL 21 (102) 6.1.4 Alt. 4: Select Extended Test The extended test is a quick-choice alternative to turn on all possible, not interactive tests, for those boards that are selected. External hardware is needed for certain tests. 6.1.5 Alt. 5: Select Medium Test The medium test is a quick-choice alternative to activate tests for selected boards, which do not require interactive operator involvement or external hardware. 6.1.6 Alt. 6: Unselect all Tests All test selections are deleted, except board selection. If this alternative is used, the user has to specify what is to be tested. 6.1.7 Alt. 7-11: Sets the Test Parameters for Each Board Each board has its own menu, where its functions can be selected or not selected for test. Some tests may require test parameters. See the following menu displays. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 22 (102) BRU3 MANUAL 6.1.8 Alt.7: Set Parameters for FCB FE Computer Board

[Main menu, Board Test, Set test parameters for FCB]

Test for FCB SYS:yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm Current test selection is MEDIUM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

DRAM test Exhaustive DRAM test DPRAM test Signal Processor test Communication IC Internal test FLASH Boot Memory test FLASH System Memory test Alarm test Ethernet Module test 0. Test menu Choose alternative:

Figure 4 Test for FCB FE Computer Board. Alt. 1 - 9 A toggle function between + (select) and - (unselect), is used to include or exclude boards from the test. Note!

+ = select

- = unselect BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 FBTEST REFERENCE MANUAL 23 (102) 6.1.9 Alt. 8: Set Parameters for FRB FE Radio Board

[Main menu, Board Test, Set test parameters for FRB]

Test for FRB SYS:yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm Current test selection is MEDIUM 1 2 3

Alarm test EEprom test Radio Loopback test 0. Test menu Choose alternative:

Figure 5 Test for FRB FE Radio Board. Alt. 1 - 3 A toggle function between + (select) and - (unselect), is used to select the type of tests that should be performed. Note!

+ = select

- = unselect BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 24 (102) BRU3 MANUAL 6.1.10 Alt. 9: Set Parameters for FNB FE Connection Board

[Main menu, Board Test, Set test parameters for FNB]

Test for FNB SYS:yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm Current test selection is MEDIUM 1 2

Serial Loopback - RS232 or RS422 Alarm Interface test 0. Test menu Choose alternative:

Figure 6 Test for FNB FE Connection Board. Alt. 1 - 2 A toggle function between + (select) and - (unselect), used to include or exclude boards from the test. Note!

+ = select

- = unselect BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 FBTEST REFERENCE MANUAL 25 (102) 6.1.11 Alt. 10: Set Parameters for FMB FE Modem Board

[Main menu, Board Test, Set test parameters for FMB]

Test for FMB SYS:yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm Current test selection is MEDIUM 1 2 3

Internal Modem test Local Loopback test Remote Loopback test 0. Test menu Choose alternative:

Figure 7 Test for FMBF FE Modem Board. Alt. 1 - 3 A toggle function between + (select) and - (unselect), is used to include or exclude boards from the test. Note!

+ = select

- = unselect BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 26 (102) BRU3 MANUAL 6.1.12 Alt. 11: Set Params for FPB FE Power Supply Board

[Main menu, Board Test, Set test parameters for FPB]

Test for FPB SYS:yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm Current test selection is MEDIUM 1

Alarm test 0. Test menu Choose alternative:

Figure 8 Test for FPB FE Power Supply Board. Alt. 1 A toggle function between + (select) and -(unselect). Note!

+ = select

- = unselect BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 FBTEST REFERENCE MANUAL 27 (102) 6.1.13 Alt.12: Look at Test Results When the batch tests are started, the Test Status is shown. It tells you how many faults have been detected for each board, and how many test cycles have been completed. If a 'Q' is pressed before the test is finished, the test is interrupted after the current cycle, and the user has the option to select the alternative Continue the test or stop the test by selecting the 0 alternative. When the test is completed, either by itself or when the user has pressed 'Q', it is possible to jump to the Examine Board screen for each board, by selecting the appropriate alternative in the menu. Figure 10 Example of Examine Board screen. shows an example of the Test Status menu when the test is finished. When selecting the Look at test result alternative (Alt. 12) in the Board test menu, the selection between NEW, OLD and OLDEST test has to be made. The three latest test results are stored and can be displayed. SELECT RESULT BUFFER: (1) NEW (2) OLD

(3) OLDEST BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 28 (102) BRU3 MANUAL

[Main menu, Board Test, Look at test result]

Test Status : SECOND SYS:yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm Current test selection is MEDIUM Comment Board 1. FCB 2. FRB 3. FNB 4. FMB 5. FAB 6. FPB NO_TEST NO_TEST NO_TEST NO_TEST Errors 0 1 0. Board Test Menu Choose Alternative:

Figure 9 Test Status menu. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 FBTEST REFERENCE MANUAL 29 (102) The Examine Board Screen Select any menu alternative except 17 or 0 in the Test Status menu to get the Examine Board screen for the corresponding board. There is one Examine Board screen for each board which has been tested. This screen contains information about what kind of errors have been detected, and at which time. If there is a printer connected to the terminal, it is possible to get a hardcopy for each tested board. Figure 10 Example of Examine Board screen. shows an example of this screen.

[Main menu, Board Test, Look at Test Results]

TMB, Modem 1 **2 errors** SYS:yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm Current test selection is MEDIUM 1993-11-20 13:42 FCB:MEMORY ERROR H01FFF 1993-11-20 13:43 FCB:MEMORY ERROR H01FFF Press 0 to go back again Figure 10 Example of Examine Board screen. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 30 (102) BRU3 MANUAL 6.2 Set Time

[Main menu, Set Time]

Set the System Clock SYS:yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm Current test selection is MEDIUM 1. Change year (1901 - 2099). 2. Change month (1 - 12). 3. Change day (1 - 31). 4. Change hour (0 - 23). 5. Change minute (0 - 59). 0. Main menu Choose alternative:

Figure 11 Set System Clock menu. Alt. 1 modifies the year (entering 4-digit value) Alt. 2 modifies the month (entering value 1 - 12) Alt. 3 modifies the day (entering value 1 - 31) Alt. 4 modifies the hour (entering value 0 - 23) Alt. 5 modifies the minute (entering value 0 - 59) The default values are displayed within brackets. Enter the current value for the respective alternatives. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 FBTEST REFERENCE MANUAL 31 (102) 6.3 Radio Operations 6.3.1 Radio Control and Calibration Menu

[Main menu, Radio Operations]

Radio Control and Calibration Menu SYS:yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm Current test selection is MEDIUM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 TRANSCEIVER SETUP MENU MEASUREMENT SETUP MENU TRANSCEIVER CONTROL AND PRESENTATION MENU CALIBRATION RADIO REGISTER EDITOR ADJUSTMENT SETUP 0. Main menu Choose alternative:

Figure 12 Radio Control and Calibration Menu. Alt. 1 TRANSCEIVER SETUP MENU Displays the Transceiver Setup menu, Figure 13. Alt. 2 MEASUREMENT SETUP MENU Displays the Transceiver Measurement/Test Setup menu, Figure 15. Alt. 3 Alt. 4 TRANSCEIVER CONTROL AND PRESENTATION MENU Displays the Transceiver Control and Presentation menu, Figure 16. CALIBRATION Displays the Radio Calibration menu, Figure 17. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 32 (102) BRU3 MANUAL Alt. 5 RADIO REGISTER EDITOR Displays the Radio Register Editor menu, Figure 37. Alt. 6 ADJUSTMENT Displays the Radio Adjustment menu, Figure 38. Alt. 7 SETUP Displays the Radio Setup menu, Figure 40. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 FBTEST REFERENCE MANUAL 33 (102) 6.3.2 Transceiver Setup Menu

[Main menu, Radio Operations, Transceiver Setup]

Figure 13 Transceiver Setup Menu (NUMBER MODE). Alt. 1 SELECT NUMBER OR FREQUENCY MODE Displays the Transceiver Setup menu, (Number Mode in Figure 13 or Frequency Mode in Figure 14). This alternative is a toggle function between channel number mode and channel frequency mode. Conversion between these modes is done automatically. The menu text is changed at appropriate places between number and frequency. RADIO SETUP The radio type parameters are read from radio registers, showing

FILTER, showing the transmitter power

FREQBAND, high or low frequency band BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 34 (102) BRU3 MANUAL

DIVERSITY, radio build with diversity function, YES (= 1) or NO (= 0). NUMBER MODE Alt. 2 SET TX CHANNEL NUMBER Displays TX_CHANNEL NUMBER, TXCH = (3840) This alternative sets the transmitter channel number. A check is made to eliminate incorrect channel values. Alt. 3 SET TX POWER Displays SELECT TX_POWER = - 21.0 PRESS Y TO SELECT N TO NEXT

[-21.0 (def), -18.0, -15.0, -12.0, -9.0, -6.0, -3.0, 0.0]

The transmitter power is set in the following steps: 0.0, -3.0, -6.0, -

9.0, -12.0, -15.0, -18.0, -21.0 dB. When this alternative is selected an operator procedure is activated where only these predefined values can be chosen by answering yes or no. Alt. 4 SET TX MODULATION Displays SELECT MODULATION = NONE PRESS Y TO SELECT N TO NEXT

[NONE (default), AC, LOW, HIGH, PRBS, PERIOD, SINE]

This alternative has the following choices, NONE, LOW, HIGH, AC, PRBS, PERIOD and SINE. The PERIOD alternative activates a question of how many HIGH and LOW values should be in the symmetrical sequence. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 FBTEST REFERENCE MANUAL 35 (102) Alt. 5 SET RX CHANNEL NUMBER Displays RX_CHANNEL NUMBER, RXCH = (3040) This alternative sets the receiver channel number. A check is made to eliminate incorrect channel values. Alt. 6 SET LOW OUTPUT POWER ALARM LIMIT Displays OUTPUT ALARM LIMIT = (10) This alternative sets the low output power limit. This value is transferred to the signal processor part, where it is checked against the calculated radio value. The alarm is activated if the LOW OUTPUT POWER ALARM value is 10 dB less than the set TX POWER value. Alt.7 SET VSWR ALARM LIMIT Displays VSWR = (1.5) This alternative sets the VSWR alarm limit. This value is transferred to the signal processor part, where it is checked against the calculated radio value. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 36 (102) BRU3 MANUAL FREQUENCY MODE

[Main menu, Radio Operations, Transceiver Setup]

Figure 14 Transceiver Setup Menu (FREQUENCY MODE). Alt. 2 SET TX CHANNEL FREQUENCY Displays TX IN Hz, > = 890 000 000: TXFRQ = (939 000 000) This alternative sets the transmitter channel frequency. A check is made to eliminate incorrect channel values. Input frequency values are given in Hz as the channel separation is 12.5 kHz. Alt.3 SET TX POWER Please refer to NUMBER MODE BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 FBTEST REFERENCE MANUAL 37 (102) Alt. 4 SET TX MODULATION Please refer to NUMBER MODE Alt. 5 SET RX CHANNEL FREQUENCY Displays RX IN Hz, > = 890 000 000: RXFRQ =(900 000 000) This alternative sets receiver channel frequency. A check is made to eliminate incorrect channel values. Alt. 6 SET LOW OUTPUT POWER ALARM LIMIT Please refer to NUMBER MODE Alt. 7 SET VSWR ALARM LIMIT Please refer to NUMBER MODE BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 38 (102) BRU3 MANUAL 6.4 Measurement Setup Menu

[Main menu, Radio Operations, Measurement Setup]

Transceiver Measurement/Test Setup Menu SYS:yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm Current test selection is MEDIUM 1 -SELECT PF MEASUREMENT 2 -SELECT PR MEASUREMENT 3 -SELECT RSSI MEASUREMENT 4 -SELECT TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT 5 -SELECT BIT ERROR RATE TEST 6 -SELECT LOOPBACK TEST 7 -SELECT ALARM STATUS 8 -SELECT DEVIATION MEASUREMENT 9 -SELECT TRANSMITTER ON/OFF 10 -SAVE TEST DATA AT STOP 11 SET TEST TIME: 0 IS FOREVERTEST CYCLES = 0 0. Radio Setup, Control and Calibration Menu Choose alternative: _ Figure 15 Transceiver Measurement/Test Setup Menu. Alt. 1 - 8. A toggle function between + (select) and - (), is used to select the type of measurements that should be performed. The results of these measurements are shown in the presentation menu. Alt. 9 SELECT TRANSMITTER ON/OFF A toggle function between + (ON) and - (OFF). BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 FBTEST REFERENCE MANUAL 39 (102) Alt. 10:

SAVE TEST DATA AT STOP A toggle function between + (active) and - (inactive). This alternative, when active, stores test data when the test period is finished. This allows the operator to compare test data, while making test observations without saving, between the save instances. Alt. 11:

SET TEST TIME Displays ENTER TEST_CYCLES (0) The number of test cycles is set, which is translated in to the time domain, if needed. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 40 (102) BRU3 MANUAL 6.4.1 Transceiver Control and Presentation Menu

[Main menu, Radio Operations, Transceiver Control and Presentation]

Transceiver Control and Presentation Menu Current test selection is MEDIUM SYS:yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm TX: OFF TXCH: 3840 PF: 0 TXSEND:OFF RXCH: 3040 SELECT TRANSMITTER ON/OFF SELECT MODULATION ON/OFF SAVE TEST DATA AT STOP SET TEST TIME:0 IS INDEFINITE TEST CYCLES = 0 1-

2-

3-

4 5 START 6 LOOK AT PREVIOUS TEST DATA 0. Radio Setup, Control and Calibration Menu Choose alternative:

Figure 16 Transceiver Control and Presentation Menu (NUMBER MODE). Alt. 1 SELECT TRANSMITTER ON/OFF A toggle function between - (ON) and + (OFF). Alt. 2 SELECT MODULATION ON/OFF A toggle function between + (ON) and - (OFF). The set value for modulation is active when modulation is ON. OFF is equal to NONE. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 FBTEST REFERENCE MANUAL 41 (102) Alt. 3 SAVE TEST DATA AT STOP A toggle function between + (YES) and - (NO). Measurement data is saved when the test period is finished. Alt. 4 SET TEST TIME Displays ENTER TEST_CYCLES (10) The test period is set in cycles, which also correspond to time. A sampling rate of about 1 second is selected, but can be changed to a practical value if necessary. Alt. 5 START The start command starts the measurement. Alt. 6 LOOK AT PREVIOUS TEST DATA Displays SELECT BUFFER 1 = LAST, 2 = PREV. or 3 = OLD (1) Measurement data are stored in two buffers, i.e., the last and previous results can be analysed. When this command is used, a question is put to the operator as to which buffer to look at. These buffers are updated if the save condition is activated. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 42 (102) BRU3 MANUAL Operating conditions: TX: OFF TXCH: 3840 PF: 0 TXSEND: OFF RXCH:

3040 The status line, below the header, indicating the present operating conditions for the transceiver with the following meaning:

TX is the status of the transmitter, either OFF or ON.

TXCH or TXFRQ is the transmitter channel frequency or number.

PF is the transmitter power from 0 to -21 dB in 3 dB steps.

TXSEND is the transmitter modulation, shown as OFF, NONE, LOW, HIGH, AC, PRBS or PERIOD. The OFF condition is shown when modulation is switched off.

RXCH or RXFRQ is the receiver channel frequency or number. Measurement data These measurements that are selected as active, are presented on the following lines before operator alternatives for control.

PF VALUE is the measured output power in dB.

PR VALUE is the measured reflected power in dB.

RSSI VALUE is the measured receive signal level in dBuVemf.

TEMPERATURE VALUE is the measured temperature on the radio board in C.

BER RX BITS is the number of received bits, RX ERR is the number of error bits and finally on this line, two bit error rates are shown as a percentage. The first value is the quotient (times 100) between the accumulated number of error bits and the number of received bits. i.e. 100*RX ERR/RX BITS. The second value (within brackets) is the same quotient, but for the received bits during the latest 1 s. (appr.). Example:

+BER Rx BITS: 588765 Rx ERR:

5687 0.966 (0.176)%

ALARM status is shown, with PF_LOW, VSWR and TEMP as YES or NO, i.e., whether the set limit is exceeded or not.

RX DEVIATION VALUE is the receive frequency measurement deviation. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 FBTEST REFERENCE MANUAL 43 (102) 6.4.2 Radio Calibration Menu

[Main menu, Radio Operations, Calibration]

Figure 17 Radio Calibration Menu. Alt. 1 BANDGAP CALIBRATION Gives the Bandgap Calibration Menu, Figure 18. Alt. 2 TEMPERATURE SENSOR CALIBRATION Gives the Temperature Calibration Menu, Figure 19. Alt. 3 REFERENCE OCXO CALIBRATION Gives Reference Oscillator OCXO Calibration menu 1, Figure 21. Alt. 4 PF POWER CALIBRATION Gives PF Power Calibration menu 1, Figure 23. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 44 (102) BRU3 MANUAL Alt. 5 PR POWER CALIBRATION Gives PR Power Calibration menu 1, Figure 25. Alt. 6 VCO MODULATION CALIBRATION Gives VCO Calibration menu 1, Figure 27. Alt. 7 TCXO MODULATION CALIBRATION Gives TCXO Calibration menu 1, Figure 29. Alt. 8 RSSI CALIBRATION Gives RSSI Calibration menu 1, Figure 31. Alt. 9 EEPROM DISPLAY (EDITOR) This alternative selects a function that will display all calibration object values. This is an overview display with the purpose of showing how calibration objects depend on temperature. Please refer to Figure 32. Alt. 10 SAVE CALIBRATION IN EEPROM This alternative saves the calibration parameters in EEPROM if something is changed. This function is called when the exit command is used, to protect from accidental exit without saving calibration data. Alt. 11 SETUP RADIO OPERATION PARAMETERS Each calibration procedure requires the radio to operate with some specific frequency, modulation or power level. This alternative is a call to the same procedure as in the transceiver setup menu. Please refer to Figure 13. Alt. 12 PA BIAS AND FDAC CALIBRATION Gives the PA Bias and FDAC Calibration Menu, Figure 36. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 FBTEST REFERENCE MANUAL 45 (102) 6.4.3 Bandgap Calibration

[Main menu, Radio Operations, Calibration, Bandgap Calibration]

Bandgap Calibration SYS:yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm Current test selection is MEDIUM CONNECT VOLTMETER TO BANDGAP VOLTAGE SIGNAL BANDGAP REFERENCE SET VALUE IS 128 NUM IS MEASURED VALUE EQUAL TO 2.5 V ?

1 INCREMENT DECREMENT 2 SET VALUE 3 4 MARK FOR STORAGE IN EEPROM 0. Calibration Menu Choose alternative:

Figure 18 Bandgap Calibration menu. The BANDGAP REFERENCE SET VALUE is a digital variable to a DA converter, which should be set to give a BANDGAP_VOLTAGE of 2.5 V. The bandgap voltage is not temperature-dependent. Alt. 1 INCREMENT Increases the bandgap by 1 step to 129. Alt. 2 DECREMENT Decreases the bandgap by 1 step to 127. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 46 (102) BRU3 MANUAL Alt. 3 SET VALUE Displays VALUE (128) The value can be changed by increment, decrement or by set functions. Alt. 4 MARK FOR STORAGE IN EEPROM This alternative indicates that, this calibration object will be saved in EEPROM when the calibration procedure is finished. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 FBTEST REFERENCE MANUAL 47 (102) 6.4.4 Temperature Sensor Calibration

[Main menu, Radio Operations, Calibration, Temp. Sensor Calibration]

Temperature Calibration Current test selection is MEDIUM SYS:yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm 1 2 SET OFFSET CALIBRATION MODE SET ABSOLUTE CALIBRATION MODE 0. Calibration Menu Choose alternative: _ Figure 19 Temperature Sensor Calibration menu. Alt. 1-2 Will display the Temperature Calibration menu, Figure 20. Alt. 1 Offset mode Alt. 2 Absolute mode BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 48 (102) BRU3 MANUAL

[Main menu, Radio Operations, Calibration, Temp. Sensor Calibration. 2]

Temperature Calibration Current test selection is MEDIUM SYS:yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm TX: OFF TXCH: 3840 PF: 0 TXSEND:OFF RXCH: 3040 TEMPERATURE A/D VALUE: 141 TEMPERATURE INDEX: 2 TDEG:

TNUM:

T1

-8.0 78 T2 6.0 107 T3 20.0 134 T4 34.0 163 T5 48.0 195 1 2 3 ENTER TEMPERATURE INDEX T1 - T5 FOR OFFSET/ABSOLUTE MODE ENTER CALIBRATION VALUE FOR OFFSET/ABSOLUTE MODE MARK FOR STORAGE IN EEPROM 0. Calibration Menu Figure 20 Temperature Sensor Calibration menu, offset and absolute mode. Alt 1. ENTER TEMPERATURE INDEX T1 - T5 FOR OFFSET/

ABSOLUTE MODE Enter TEMPERATURE INDEX (2):

Alt 2. ENTER CALIBRATION VALUE FOR OFFSET/ABSOLUTE MODE Displays whether the temperature is OK or NOT. Alt. 3 MARK FOR STORAGE IN EEPROM This alternative indicates that this calibration object will be saved in EEPROM when the calibration procedure is finished. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 FBTEST REFERENCE MANUAL 49 (102) 6.4.5 Reference Oscillator OCXO Calibration

[Main menu, Radio Operations, Calibration, Reference OCXO Calibration]

Reference Oscillator OCXO Calibration SYS:yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm Current test selection is MEDIUM 1 SELECT OFFSET CALIBRATION MODE 2 SELECT ABSOLUTE CALIBRATION MODE 0. Calibration Menu Choose alternative: _ Figure 21 Reference Oscillator OCXO Calibration - 1 menu. Alt. 1-2 Will display the Reference Oscillator OCXO Calibration menus in Figure 22. Alt. 1 Offset mode Alt. 2 Absolute mode BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 50 (102) BRU3 MANUAL

[Main menu, Radio Operations, Calibration, Reference OCXO Calibration]

Reference Oscillator OCXO Calibration SYS:yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm Current test selection is MEDIUM TX: OFF TXCH: 3840 PF: 0 TXSEND:OFF RXCH: 3040 PF. INDEX: 2 T1 TDEG: -8.0 OCXO: 80 T2 6.0 80 TEMP INDEX: 2 T3 20.0 81 T4 34.0 81 T5 48.0 81 IS OCXO FREQUENCY OK ON EXTERNAL INSTRUMENT ?

1 ENTER TEMPERATURE INDEX FOR OCXO IN OFFSET/ABSOLUTE MODE 2 5 6 -

INCREMENT3 DECREMENT4 MARK FOR STORAGE IN EEPROM SELECT TRANSMITTER ON/OFF SET VALUE 0. Calibration Menu Figure 22 Reference Oscillator OCXO Calibration - 2 menu. Alt. 1 ENTER TEMPERATURE INDEX FOR OCXO IN OFFSET/

ABSOLUTE MODE Enter TEMPERATURE INDEX (2). Alt. 2 INCREMENT Increases the OCXO value in steps. Alt. 3 DECREMENT Decreases the OCXO value in steps. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 FBTEST REFERENCE MANUAL 51 (102) Alt. 4 SET VALUE Sets VALUE (xx) The value can be changed by increment, decrement or by the set function. Alt. 5 MARK FOR STORAGE IN EEPROM After some changes of the old value, the new value can be marked for storage in EEPROM, when the calibration procedure is finished. Alt. 6 SELECT TRANSMITTER ON/OFF A toggle function between + (ON) and - (OFF). BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 52 (102) BRU3 MANUAL 6.4.6 PF Output Power Calibration

[Main menu, Radio Operations, Calibration, PF Power Calibration]

PF Power Calibration SYS:yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm Current test selection is MEDIUM 1 2 SELECT OFFSET CALIBRATION MODE SELECT ABSOLUTE CALIBRATION MODE 0. Calibration Menu Choose alternative:

Figure 23 PF Power Calibration menu. Alt. 1-2 Will display the PF Power Calibration menu in the next figure, Figure 24. Alt. 1 Offset mode Alt. 2 Absolute mode BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 FBTEST REFERENCE MANUAL 53 (102)

[Main menu, Radio Operations, Calibration, PF Power Calibration]

PF Power Calibration SYS:yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm Current test selection is MEDIUM TX: OFF TXCH: 3840 PF: 0 TXSEND:OFF RXCH: 3040 PF. INDEX: 2 T1 TDEG

-8.0 PFNUM: 108 128 PFM:

1 PFSET: -21.0 PFNUM: 101 PFM 118 TEMP INDEX: 2 T2 6.0 107 126 T3 20.0 107 124 T4 34.0 107 121 T5 48.0 106 117 2

-18.0 107 126 3

-15.0 117 137 4

-12.0 128 150 5

-9.0 141 167 7 6 8

-6.0 -3.0 0.0 177 201 237 157 186 211 1 2 3 7 - SELECT TRANSMITTER ON/OFF ENTER TX POWER OR PF INDEX P1-P8 FOR OFFSET/ABSOLUTE MODE ENTER TEMPERATURE INDEX FOR PF IN OFFSET/ABSOLUTE MODE INCREMENT 4 DECREMENT 5 SET VALUE 6 MARK FOR EEPROM 0. Calibration Menu Choose alternative:

Figure 24 PF Power Calibration menu. Alt. 1 ENTER TX POWER OR PF INDEX P1-P8 FOR OFFSET/

ABSOLUTE MODE Displays SELECT TX_POWER = -21.0 PRESS Y TO SELECT N TO NEXT

[-21.0 (def), -18.0, -15.0, -12.0, -9.0, -6.0, -3.0, 0.0]

BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 54 (102) BRU3 MANUAL Alt. 2 ENTER TEMPERATURE INDEX FOR PF IN OFFSET/

ABSOLUTE MODE Displays TEMPERATURE INDEX (2) Alt. 3 INCREMENT Increases the value in steps. Alt. 4 DECREMENT Decreases the value in steps. Alt. 5 SET VALUE Displays VALUE (x) The alternatives, if the temperature check was OK, modify the output reference value. The measured output power on the external instrument is calibrated to the defined nominal value for the selected PF index. In offset calibration all reference values for the selected PF index are changed. Alt. 6 MARK FOR STORAGE IN EEPROM This alternative indicates that this calibration object will be saved in EEPROM when the calibration procedure is finished. Alt. 7 SELECT TRANSMITTER ON/OFF A toggle function between + (ON) and - (OFF). Operational conditions The transmitter and receiver conditions are shown, as described in the transceiver control and presentation menu. The operation conditions are changed in Radio Calibration Menu. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 FBTEST REFERENCE MANUAL 55 (102) 6.4.7 PR Reflected Power Calibration

[Main menu, Radio Operations, Calibration, PR Power Calibration]

PR Power Calibration SYS:yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm Current test selection is MEDIUM 1 2 SELECT OFFSET CALIBRATION MODE SELECT ABSOLUTE CALIBRATION MODE 0. Calibration Menu Choose alternative:

Figure 25 PR Power Calibration - 1 menu. Alt. 1-2 Will display PR Power Calibration menu 2, Figure 26. Alt. 1 Offset mode Alt. 2 Absolute mode BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 56 (102) BRU3 MANUAL

[Main menu, Radio Operations, Calibration, PR Power Calibration]

Figure 26 PR Power Calibration - 2 menu. Alt. 1 SELECT TX POWER INDEX P1-P8 FOR OFFSET/ABSOLUTE MODE Displays SELECT TX_POWER = -21.0 PRESS Y TO SELECT N TO NEXT

[-21.0 (def), -18.0, -15.0, -12.0, -9.0, -6.0, -3.0, 0.0]

Alt. 2 ENTER TEMPERATURE INDEX T1-T5 FOR OFFSET/

ABSOLUTE MODE Displays TEMPERATURE INDEX (2) The temperature index is selected and the temperature check as described for temperature calibration is initiated. Alt. 3 READ AND ENTER CALIBRATION VALUE FOR OFFSET MODE BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 FBTEST REFERENCE MANUAL 57 (102) Alt. 4 MARK FOR STORAGE IN EEPROM This alternative indicates that this calibration object will be saved in EEPROM when the calibration procedure is finished. Alt. 5 SELECT TRANSMITTER ON/OFF A toggle function between + (ON) and - (OFF). Alt. 6 SLOT NUMBER [1-2]

Displays the selected slot number. Enter the desired slot number Alt. 7 ATTENUATION [1/10 dB]

Displays the attenuation for the selected slot (1/10 dB) Enter the desired cable loss in dB for slot 1 and 2 respectively. The slot number is selected in alternative 6. If the temperature check was OK these alternatives modify the output reference value. The measured output power is calibrated to the defined nominal value for the selected PF index. In offset calibration, all reference values for the selected PF index are changed. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 58 (102) BRU3 MANUAL 6.4.8 VCO Modulation Calibration

[Main menu, Radio Operations, Calibration, VCO Calibration]

VCO Calibration SYS:yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm Current test selection is MEDIUM 1 2 SELECT OFFSET CALIBRATION MODE SELECT ABSOLUTE CALIBRATION MODE 0. Calibration Menu Choose alternative: _ Figure 27 VCO Calibration - 1 menu. Alt. 1-2 Will display the VCO Calibration menu 2, Figure 28. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 FBTEST REFERENCE MANUAL 59 (102)

[Main menu, Radio Operations, Calibration, VCO Calibration]

VCO Calibration SYS:yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm Current test selection is MEDIUM TX: OFF TXCH: 3840 PF: 0 TXSEND:OFF RXCH: 3040 TEMP INDEX: 2 T1 TDEG: -8.0 VCO:

212 SLOT: 1 CHANNEL: 3800 T2 6.0 201 T3 20.0 189 T4 34.0 182 T5 48.0 179 ENTER TEMPERATURE INDEX FOR VCO IN OFFSET/ABSOLUTE MODE INCREMENT3 MARK FOR STORAGE IN EEPROM DECREMENT4 SET VALUE 1 2 5 6 - SELECT TRANSMITTER ON/OFF 7 8 - SELECT MODULATION ON/OFF 9 10 SELECT SLOT SELECT SLOT CHANNEL SELECT MODULATION 0. Calibration Menu Choose alternative:

Figure 28 VCO Calibration - 2 menu. Alt. 1 ENTER TEMPERATURE INDEX T1-T5 FOR OFFSET/

ABSOLUTE MODE Displays TEMPERATUR INDEX (2) The temperature index is selected and the temperature check, as described for temperature calibration, is initiated. Alt. 2 INCREMENT Increases the value in steps. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 60 (102) BRU3 MANUAL Alt. 3 DECREMENT Decreases the value in steps. Alt. 4 SET VALUE Displays SET VCO (201) The value can be changed by increment, decrement or by set functions. Alt. 5 MARK FOR STORAGE IN EEPROM This alternative indicates that this calibration object will be saved in EEPROM when the calibration procedure is finished. Alt. 6 SELECT TRANSMITTER ON/OFF This alternative is a toggle function between + (ON) and -

(OFF). Alt. 7 SELECT MODULATION Displays SELECT MODULATION = NONE PRESS Y TO SELECT N FOR NEXT

[NONE (default), AC, LOW, HIGH, PRBS, PERIOD, SINE]

Alt. 8 SELECT MODULATION ON/OFF This alternative is a toggle function between + (ON) and -

(OFF). BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 FBTEST REFERENCE MANUAL 61 (102) Alt. 9 SELECT SLOT Displays SLOT NUMBER [1-3] (1) 34xx:

For each slot the calibration has to be done at three different frequencies. The frequency band, selected in the Radio Operation Parameters in menu in Figure 17, shall be divided into the current number of slots. The number of slots is determined by the total frequency band covered by the BRU3 variant. 38xx and 39xx:

The calibration is done at one frequency. Enter SLOT NUMBER = 1. Alt. 10 SELECT SLOT CHANNEL Displays SLOT CHANNEL (3800) The SLOT CHANNEL is the upper limit of the channel number for current slot (slot 1, slot 2 or slot 3) 34xx:

The upper limit for slot 3 shall be set to -1 (=). 38xx and 39xx:

The upper limit for slot 1 shall be set to -1 (=). Reference values The VCO modulation gain parameters are shown for all temperature index values. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 62 (102) BRU3 MANUAL 6.4.9 TCXO Modulation Calibration

[Main menu, Radio Operations, Calibration, TCXO Calibration]

TCXO Calibration SYS:yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm Current test selection is MEDIUM 1 2 SELECT OFFSET CALIBRATION MODE SELECT ABSOLUTE CALIBRATION MODE 0. Calibration Menu Choose alternative:

Figure 29 TCXO Calibration - 1 menu. Alt. 1-2 Displays TCXO Calibration menu 2, Figure 30. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 FBTEST REFERENCE MANUAL 63 (102)

[Main menu, Radio Operations, Calibrations, TCXO Calibration]

TCXO Calibration SYS:yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm Current test selection is MEDIUM TX: OFF TXCH: 3840 PF: 0 TXSEND:OFF RXCH: 3040 TEMP INDEX: 2 T1 TDEG: -8.0 TCXO: 234 T2 6.0 234 T3 20.0 234 T4 34.0 234 T5 48.0 234 1 ENTER TEMPERATURE INDEX FOR TCXO IN OFFSET/ABSOLUTE 2 5 6 -

7 8 -

9 -

DECREMENT4 MODE INCREMENT3 MARK FOR STORAGE IN EEPROM SELECT TRANSMITTER ON/OFF SELECT MODULATION SELECT MODULATION ON/OFF VCO MODULATION ON/OFF SET VALUE 0. Calibration Menu Choose alternative:

Figure 30 TCXO Calibration - 2 menu. Operational conditions The transmitter and receiver conditions are shown, as described in the transceiver control and presentation menu. The operation conditions are changed in Radio Calibration Menu. Reference values The TCXO modulation gain parameter is shown for all temperature index values. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 64 (102) BRU3 MANUAL Alt. 1 ENTER TEMPERATURE INDEX T1-T5 FOR OFFSET/

ABSOLUTE MODE Displays TEMPERATURE INDEX (2) The temperature index is selected and the temperature check, as described for temperature calibration, is initiated. Alt. 2 INCREMENT Increases the value in steps. Alt. 3 DECREMENT Decreases the value in steps. Alt. 4 SET VALUE Display SET TCXO (215) If the temperature check was OK these alternatives modify the output gain value. The measured frequency deviation on the external instrument should be within specified limits. In offset calibration, all reference values are changed. Alt. 5 MARK FOR STORAGE IN EEPROM This alternative indicates that this calibration object will be saved in EEPROM when the calibration procedure is finished. Alt. 6 SELECT TRANSMITTER ON/OFF This alternative is a toggle function between + (ON) and -

(OFF). BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 FBTEST REFERENCE MANUAL 65 (102) Alt. 7 SELECT MODULATION Selects the modulation Displays SELECT MODULATION = NONE PRESS Y TO SELECT NO FOR NEXT

[NONE (default), AC, LOW, HIGH, PRBS, PERIOD, SINE]

Alt. 8 SELECT MODULATION ON/OFF This function is a toggle function between + (ON) and - (OFF). Alt. 9 VCO MODULATION ON/OFF This function is a toggle function between + (ON) and - (OFF). BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 66 (102) BRU3 MANUAL 6.4.10 RSSI Calibration

[Main menu, Radio Operations, Calibration, RSSI Calibration]

RSSI Calibration SYS:yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm Current test selection is MEDIUM TX: OFF TXCH: 3840 PF: 0 TXSEND:OFF RXCH: 3040 RSSI INDEX: 2 TDEG: -7.0 RSSI:

85 T1 T2 T3 3.0 13.0 108 126 T4 23.0 143 T5 33.0 164 T6 43.0 169 T7 53.0 169 T8 63.0 167 T9 T10 73.0 83.0 117 74 SET SIGNAL STRENGTH TO REFERENCE VALUE 1 2 3 SELECT RSSI INDEX S1 - S10 READ AND ENTER CALIBRATION VALUE MARK FOR STORAGE IN EEPROM 0. Calibration Menu Choose alternative: _ Figure 31 RSSI Calibration menu. Status Line:

Operational conditions The transmitter and receiver conditions are shown, as described in the transceiver control and presentation menu. The operation conditions are changed in Radio Calibration Menu. Reference values The measured input signal RSSI, is shown for reference points R1 - R10. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 FBTEST REFERENCE MANUAL 67 (102) Alt. 1 SELECT RSSI INDEX S1-S10 FOR OFFSET/ABSOLUTE MODE Displays RSSI SIGNAL INDEX (2) The RSSI index is selected. The measured RSSI value is entered at reference index point, when the signal strength is set to the defined value at the external instrument. Alt. 2 READ AND ENTER CALIBRATION VALUE Alt 3 MARK FOR STORAGE IN EEPROM This alternative indicates that this calibration object will be saved in EEPROM when the calibration procedure is finished. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 68 (102) BRU3 MANUAL 6.4.11 EEPROM Display Editor Menu

[Main menu, Radio Operations, Calibration, EEPROM Display Editor-1]

Figure 32 EEPROM Display menu - screen 1. Alt.1 SELECT SCREEN 1 This menu BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 FBTEST REFERENCE MANUAL 69 (102) Alt. 2 SELECT SCREEN 2

[Main menu, Radio Operations, Calibration, EEPROM Display Editor-2]

Figure 33 EEPROM Display menu - screen 2. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 70 (102) BRU3 MANUAL Alt. 3 SELECT SCREEN 3

[Main menu, Radio Operations, Calibration, EEPROM Display Editor-3]

Figure 34 EEPROM Display menu - screen 3. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 FBTEST REFERENCE MANUAL 71 (102) Alt. 4 SELECT SCREEN 4

[Main menu, Radio Operations, Calibration, EEPROM Display Editor-4]

Figure 35 EEPROM Display menu - screen 4. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 72 (102) BRU3 MANUAL 6.4.12 PA Bias and FDAC Calibration Menu

[Main menu, Radio Operations, Calibration, PA Bias and FDAC Calibration]

Figure 36 PA Bias and FDAC Calibration Menu. Alt. 1 SET PA BIAS DRIVER Shows the current setting of the driver bias (a). Alt. 2 SET PA BIAS FINAL Shows the current setting of the final bias (a). Alt. 3 SET FDAC RX Shows the current setting of the Rx syntheziser (a). Alt. 4 SET FDAC TX Shows the current setting of the Tx syntheziser (a). BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 FBTEST REFERENCE MANUAL 73 (102) Alt. 5 SETUP RADIO OPERATION PARAMETERS Shows the current setting of the radio operation parameters (a). Alt. 6 SELECT TRANSMITTER ON/OFF Shows the current setting of the transmitter (a).

(a) When a new value is entered it takes effect on the radio board im-

mediately. The new value will be stored in the EEPROM after con-

firmation. The setting can be changed by entering a new value. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 74 (102) BRU3 MANUAL 6.4.13 Radio Register Editor Menu

[Main menu, Radio Operations, Radio Register Editor]

Radio Register Editor Menu SYS:yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm Current test selection is MEDIUM 1 2 READ RADIO REGISTER WRITE RADIO REGISTER 0. Previous Menu Choose alternative: _ Figure 37 Radio Register Editor Menu. Alt. 1 READ RADIO REGISTER Displays ADDRESS = (1). enabling reading of the address number. Alt. 2 WRITE RADIO REGISTER Displays ADDRESS = (1). enabling writing of the register value. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 FBTEST REFERENCE MANUAL 75 (102) 6.4.14 Adjustment

[Main menu, Radio Operations, Adjustment]

Radio Adjustment Menu SYS:yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm Current test selection is MEDIUM 1 2 OCXO AGE ADJUSTMENT SAVE ADJUSTMENT IN EEPROM 0. Radio Control and Calibration Menu Choose alternative: _ Figure 38 Radio Adjustment Menu. Alt. 1 OCXO AGE ADJUSTMENT Displays the menu in Figure 39. Alt. 2 SAVE ADJUSTMENT IN EEPROM Saves the adjustment in EEPROM. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 76 (102) BRU3 MANUAL

[Main menu, Radio Operations, Adjustment, OCXO Age Adjustment]

OCXO Age Adjustment Menu SYS:yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm Current test selection is MEDIUM CURRENT ADJUSTMENT VALUE IS 0 1 2 3 4 INCREMENT DECREMENT SET VALUE MARK FOR STORAGE IN EEPROM 0. Adjustment menu Choose alternative: _ Figure 39 OCXO Age Adjustment Menu. Alt. 1 INCREMENT Increases the CURRENT ADJUSTMENT VALUE in steps. Alt. 2 DECREMENT Decreases the CURRENT ADJUSTMENT VALUE in steps. Alt. 3 SET VALUE Displays VALUE (0) The CURRENT ADJUSTMENT VALUE can be set. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 FBTEST REFERENCE MANUAL 77 (102) Alt. 4 MARK FOR STORAGE IN EEPROM This alternative indicates that this calibration object will be saved in EEPROM when the calibration procedure is finished. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 78 (102) BRU3 MANUAL 6.4.15 Setup

[Main menu, Radio Operations, Setup]

Figure 40 Radio Setup Menu. Alt. 1 FREQUENCY BAND A toggle function between 400-1, 400-2, 800, 819 and 900 MHz. This alternative is used to choose between the 400-1 and 400-2 MHz, 800 and 819 MHz and 900 MHz bands. 400-2 equals the UK National frequency band. 400-1 equals all other 400 MHz frequency bands including the UK City frequency band. 800 and 819 MHz covers the 800 MHz band using different base frequencies for channel number 0. Alt. 2 CHANNEL SPACING Toggles channel spacing between 6.25 and 12.5 kHz. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 FBTEST REFERENCE MANUAL 79 (102) Alt. 3 RADIO BOARD ROA Toggles radio board between:

Unknown (old)

ROA 1179842/1 (900 MHz)

ROA 1179842/3 (800 MHz)

ROA 117 8897 (400 MHz) Alt. 4 RADIO BOARD ROA REVISION Sets radio board revision number Alt. 5 DEFAULT TX CHANNEL NUMBER Displays DISPL. TX CHAN. (3840) Sets the transmitter channel number. Alt. 6 DEFAULT RX CHANNEL NUMBER Displays DISPL. RX CHAN. (3040) Sets the receiver channel number. Alt. 7 LOAD AND SAVE DEFAULT CALIBRATION DATA Sets the default data for the current radio board and frequency board. Alt. 0 SAVE PARAMETER IN PHYSICAL EEPROM This alternative indicates that this calibration object will be saved in EEPROM when the calibration procedure is finished. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 80 (102) BRU3 MANUAL 6.5 Modem Operation Menu

[Main menu, Modem Operations]

Modem Operation SYS:yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm Current test selection is MEDIUM 1. Line Speed on Modem port 2. DTR status 3. RTS status 4. Transparent Mode access 9600 OFF OFF 0. Main menu Choose alternative:

Figure 41 Modem Operation menu. Alt. 1 LINE SPEED ON MODEM PORT This toggle function provides a step-by-step increase of the transmission rate starting with 1200 and further 2400, 4800, 7200, 9600, 14400, 19200 up to 38400 bps from where the cycle will repeat itself. DTR STATUS A toggle function between ON and OFF. RTS STATUS A toggle function between ON and OFF. TRANSPARENT MODE ACCESS Alt. 2 Alt. 3 Alt. 4 Transparent access to modem. Return from this mode is achieved by pressing CTRL + C three times. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 FBTEST REFERENCE MANUAL 81 (102) 6.6 Status Overview Menu

[Main menu, Status Overview]

Figure 42 Status Overview menu. Figure 42 Status Overview menu. shows an example of the Status Overview menu. Status Line DAA Status will display the current country code. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 82 (102) BRU3 MANUAL 6.7 Edit Loader Parameters Menu

[Main menu, Edit Loader Parameters]

Edit Loader Parameters SYS:yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm Current test selection is MEDIUM 1. Node 0 2. Ports 3. Channels 4. Connections 5. Read parameters from Flash 6. Store parameters to Flash 0. Main menu Choose alternative:

Figure 43 Edit Loader Parameters menu. Note!

Normally, an edit session starts with the selection of alt 5., to read in the present values from Flash. Otherwise a default set of parameters is used. Alt. 1 NODE 0. For example if node number alternative 1 is selected the program will ask for a node number between 0 - 99999. Displays Own node number [0 - 99999]: (0) The required Own node number should be entered. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 FBTEST REFERENCE MANUAL 83 (102) Alt. 2 PORTS Displays the Define Ports menu in Figure 44. Alt. 3 CHANNELS Displays the Define Channels menu in Figure 50. Alt. 4 CONNECTIONS Displays the Define Connections menu in Figure 53. Alt. 5 READ PARAMETERS FROM FLASH Reads the parameters stored in flash. Alt. 6 STORE PARAMETERS TO FLASH Saves the parameters in FLASH. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 84 (102) BRU3 MANUAL 6.7.1 Ports

[Main menu, Edit Loader Parameters, Ports]

Define ports SYS:yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm Current test selection is MEDIUM 1. Port 2. Not in use

: 1 0. Previous menu Choose alternative:

Figure 44 Define Ports - Not in use menu. Alt. 1 PORT Displays Port number [1-1]:(1) The desired physical port can only be set to 1 as only one port is available on the BRU3. Alt. 2 NOT IN USE Selects between Not in use or In use by toggling. The select In use displays the menu in Figure 45. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 FBTEST REFERENCE MANUAL 85 (102)

[Main menu, Edit Loader Parameters, Ports]

Define ports SYS:yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm Current test selection is MEDIUM 1 Port 2 In use 3 Unit number 4 Local port number 5 Modem parameters 6 X25 parameters

: 1

: 0

: 1 0. Previous menu Choose alternative: _ Figure 45 Define Ports - In use menu. Alt. 1 PORT Choose alternative: Port number [1 - 1]: (1) Alt. 2 IN USE Selects between Not in use or In use by toggling. The select In use displays the menu in Figure 44. Alt. 3 UNIT NUMBER Choose alternative: Unit number [0 - 0]: (0) As only one unit is available on the BRU3, the set value should be 0. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 86 (102) BRU3 MANUAL Alt. 4 LOCAL PORT NUMBER Choose alternative: Local port number [1 - 1] (1) As only one local port is available on the BRU3, the set value should be 1. Alt. 5 MODEM PARAMETERS Displays the Port - Modem Parameter menu in Figure 46. Alt. 6 X.25 PARAMETERS Displays the Port - X.25 Parameter menu in Figure 49. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 FBTEST REFERENCE MANUAL 87 (102)

[Main menu, Edit Loader Parameters, Ports, Modem Parameters]

Define modem parameters SYS:yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm Current test selection is MEDIUM 1 Modem in use 2 Control type 3 Prompt 4 Bitrate 5 Dial timeout 6 Answer timeout 7 Init commands 8 Dial commands

: YES

: ATHAYES

: OK

: 9600

: 60

: 60 0. Previous menu Choose alternative:

Figure 46 Edit Modem Parameters menu. Alt. 1 MODEM IN USE A toggle function between YES or NO. CONTROL TYPE Alt. 2 A toggle function, selection between ATHAYES, ATHAYES_LL, V25BIS and NO_CONTROL can be made.The alternative ATHAYES_LL gives Alt. 6 Retry timeout. PROMPT Alt. 3 The PROMPT: question should be set to OK. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 88 (102) BRU3 MANUAL Alt. 4 BIT RATE A toggle function between bit rates 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 and 14400, where the bit rate normally should be set to 9600, but it is possible to select other rates by toggling. Note! This bit rate setting is related to asynchronous communication

(sending initiation commands to the modem). DIAL TIMEOUT Alt. 5 The Dial Timeout in seconds should be entered. Dial timeout [sec][0 - 500]: (0) The value should normally be 60 sec. ANSWER TIMEOUT Alt. 6 The Answer Timeout in seconds should be entered. Answer timeout [sec][0 - 500]: (0) The value should normally be 60 sec. RETRY TIMEOUT The (Answer) Retry Timeout in (milliseconds) seconds should be entered. Answer timeout [sec][0 - 600000]: (0) The value should normally be 600000. RETRY TIMEOUT is used when control type ATHAYES_LL has been selected. The value controls how often the modem tries to connect to the leased line. The established dial-up connection is disconnected during theses attempts. INIT COMMANDS Alt. 7 Displays the Prompt - Modem Parameter - Init Command menu in Figure 47. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 FBTEST REFERENCE MANUAL 89 (102) Alt. 8 DIAL COMMANDS Displays the 10 Dial Command sequences, please refer to the menu in Figure 48.

[Main menu, Edit Loader Parameters, Ports, Modem Parameters, Init Commands]

Modem Initial Command for Port 1 SYS:yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm Current test selection is MEDIUM 1 Command 1 : ATE0 2 Command 2 : AT&D2 3 Command 3 : AT&M1 4 Command 4 :

5 Command 5 :

0. Previous menu Choose alternative: _ Figure 47 Edit Modem Parameters menu, Init Commands. Note!

Commands 1 5 above are used differently depending on the selected control type. If ATHAYES is selected, commands 1 5 are sent to the modem for initialization, followed by the telephone numbers specified in Figure 48 Edit Modem Parameters menu, Dial Commands.. If ATHAYES_LL is selected, commands 1 3 are sent to the modem to initialize it for leased-line mode. If this does not work and the modem attempts to established a dial-up connection, commands 4 5 are sent to the modem for initialization, followed by the telephone numbers specified in Figure 48. Prior to an attempt to establish a connection, the loader program will send the above defined init commands to the modem. It is possible to define additional init commands in 4 and 5. For more information about modem settings, please refer to the Telephone Modem Settings section. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 90 (102) BRU3 MANUAL

[Main menu, Edit Loader Parameters, Ports, Modem Parameters, Dial Commands]

Modem Dial Command for Port 1 SYS:yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm Current test selection is MEDIUM 1 Command 1 : ATD543301 2 Command 2 : ATD543302 3 Command 3 :

4 Command 4 :

5 Command 5 :

6 Command 6 :

7 Command 7 :

8 Command 8 :

9 Command 9 :

10 Command 10 :

0. Previous menu Choose alternative: _ Figure 48 Edit Modem Parameters menu, Dial Commands. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 FBTEST REFERENCE MANUAL 91 (102)

[Main menu, Edit Loader Parameters, Ports, X.25 Parameters]

X25 parameters for port 1 SYS:yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm Current test selection is MEDIUM 1 Local address 2 Packet size 3 Window size 4 Bitrate 5 Ltc channel 6 Htc channel 7 Network 8 Network ID 0. Previous menu

: 1

: 512

: 2

: 9600 bps

: 1

: 8

: X25 Network

: 255 Choose alternative:

Figure 49 Edit X.25 Parameters menu. Alt 1. Enter the LOCAL ADDRESS:

Enter your own X.25 address. Alt 2. Enter the PACKET SIZE [-1 - 512]:(512) Alt 3. Enter the WINDOW SIZE [-1 - 7]:(2) Alt 4. Enter the bit rate, a toggle function between 1200 bps, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200, 48000, 56000, 64000 bps, External 115 and External 114. Default External 115. Alt 5. Enter the Ltc channel [0 - 255]:(1), 2 if PVC Alt 6. Enter the Htc channel [0 - 255]:(8), Normally 8 Alt 7. A toggle function between X.25 Network or No Network. Alt 8. Enter the Network ID [0 - 9999]:(255) the X.25 ID if X.25 Network. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 92 (102) BRU3 MANUAL 6.7.2 Channels Alt. 3 Channels in the Edit Loader Parameters Menu displays the following menu:

[Main menu, Edit Loader Parameters, Channels]

Define channels SYS:yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm Current test selection is MEDIUM 1. Channel 2. Not in use

: 1 0. Previous menu Choose alternative: _ Figure 50 Define Channels menu. If alternative 1 is selected, the Choose alternative will change to:

Channel number [1 - 5]: (1). BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 FBTEST REFERENCE MANUAL 93 (102)

[Main menu, Edit Loader Parameters, Channels]

Define channels SYS:yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm Current test selection is MEDIUM 1. Channel 2. In use 3. Port 4. Local channel number 5. X.25 Parameters

: 1

: 1

: 1 0. Previous menu Choose alternative: _ Figure 51 Define Channels menu. Alt 1. Enter the Channel number [1 - 5]:(1), select the channel number to be edited. Alt 3. Enter the Port number [1 - 1]:(1) Alt 4. Enter the Local channel number [0 - 255]:(1) Alt 5. Displays the menu X.25 parameters for channel 1 in Figure 52. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 94 (102) BRU3 MANUAL

[Main menu, Edit Loader Parameters, Channels, X.25 Parameters]

X.25 parameters for channel 1 SYS:yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm Current test selection is MEDIUM 1. Remote address 2. Packet size 3. Window size 4. Connection type 5. Logical channel 6. Request rev chg 7. Accept rev chg 8. Accept empty addr

: 00000

: 128

: 2

: VC

: -1

: No

: Yes

: No 0. Previous menu Choose alternative: _ Figure 52 25 Parameters for Channel 1 menu. Alt 1. Enter the Remote address: The Address for the MOX. Alt 2. Enter Packet size [-1 - 512]:(128) Alt 3. Enter Window size [-1 - 7]:(2) Alt 4. Alt 5. Enter the Connection type:

A toggle function between VC and PVC type. VC - mode:

Not alterable in VC-mode. Press any key to continue:

PVC - mode:

LOGCHAN [1 - 4095]:(1) Alt 6-8 A toggle function between YES and NO. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 FBTEST REFERENCE MANUAL 95 (102) 6.7.3 Connections Alt. 4 Connections in the Edit Loader Parameters Menu displays the following menu:

[Main menu, Edit Loader Parameters, Connections]

Define connections SYS:yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm Current test selection is MEDIUM 1. Connection 2. Not in use

: 1 0. Previous menu Choose alternative:

Figure 53 Define Connection menu. Alt 1. Enter the Connection number [1 - 5]:(1) Alt 2. A choice between NOT IN USE and IN USE. The in use alternative gives the menu in Figure 54. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 96 (102) BRU3 MANUAL

[Main menu, Edit Loader Parameters, Connections]

Define connections SYS:yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm Current test selection is MEDIUM 1. Connection 2. In use 3. Remote node 4. Priority 5. Channel

: 1

: 0

: 0

: 1 0. Previous menu Choose alternative: _ Figure 54 Edit Loader Parameters menu - selection of connection. Alt 1. Enter the Connection number [1 - 5]:(0) Alt 2. Enter the Remote node number [0 - 99999]:(0) Alt 3. Enter the Priority [0 - 255]:(0) Alt 4. Enter Channel [1 - 5]:(1) BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 FBTEST REFERENCE MANUAL 97 (102) 6.7.4 Read Parameters from FLASH

[Main menu, Edit Loader Parameters, Read Parameters from FLASH]

Edit loader parameters SYS:yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm Current test selection is MEDIUM 1 Node XXXXX 2 Ports 3 Channels 4 Connections 5 Read parameters from Flash 6 Store parameters to Flash 0. Main menu Choose alternative:

Figure 55 Edit Loader Parameters menu - selection of parameters. Alt 1. Enter your own node number [0 - 9999]: (xxxxx) Alt 2. Gives the menu in Figure 45. Alt 3. Gives the menu in Figure 51. Alt 4. Gives the menu in Figure 54. Alt 5. Reads the parameters from Flash. Alt 6. Stores the parameters in Flash. Note!

Alternative 6 should now be selected! If alternative 5 is selected, the result will be that the newly entered or modified parameter values will be overwritten by the values stored in the Flash PROM. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 98 (102) BRU3 MANUAL 6.7.5 Store Parameters in FLASH The messages Storing data in Flash, followed by Data stored successfully in Flash will be briefly displayed. The menu will then return to normal display:

[Main menu, Edit Loader Parameters, Store Parameters in FLASH]

Edit loader parameters SYS:yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm Current test selection is MEDIUM 1 Node XXXXX 2 Ports 3 Channels 4 Connections 5 Read parameters from Flash 6 Store parameters to Flash 0. Main menu Choose alternative:

Figure 56 Edit Loader Parameters menu - selection of parameters. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 FBTEST REFERENCE MANUAL 99 (102) 7 Index Adjustment Alarm Limit Answer Timeout Bandgap Bit rate Board Test Cable loss Calibration Calibration Value Channels Connections Control Type Dial Commands Dial Timeout DTR Status EEPROM Extended Test Frequency Frequency Mode Init Commands Line Speed Loader Parameters Low Output Power Main Menu Measurement Setup Medium Test Modem Operation Modem Parameters Modulation Modulation ON/OFF Node 0 Number Mode OCXO Age Adjustment Parameters PF Output Power Port Number Ports PR Reflected Power 73 35, 37 86 45 86 18 57 31, 43, 45, 47, 49, 52, 55, 57, 58, 62, 66 48, 67 90 93 85 87 86 78 68 21 76 33 87 78 80 35, 37 28 38 21 78 85 60, 65 40 80 33 74 44, 77, 80 52 84 82 55 BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 100 (102) BRU3 MANUAL Prompt Radio Radio Control Radio Operation Radio Register Radio Setup Reference Oscillator OCXO RSSI RSSI Index S1-S10 RTS Status RX Channel Frequency RX Channel Number Set Time Setup Slot Channel Slot Selection Status Overview Store Parameters in FLASH TCXO Modulation Temperature Index Temperature Index for OCXO Temperature Index T1 - T5 Temperature Sensor Test Cycles Test Parameters, FCB - FE Computer Board Test Parameters, FMB - FE Modem Board Test Parameters, FNB - FE Connection Board Test Parameters, FPB - FE Power Supply Board Test Parameters, FRB - FE Radio Board Test Time Transceiver Control and Presentation Transceiver Setup Transmitter ON/OFF Transparent Mode TX Channel Frequency TX Channel Number TX Modulation TX Power TX Power Index P1 - P8 TX Power or PF Index P1 - P8 85 43 31 44 72 33 49 66 67 78 37 35 30 76 61 61 79 96 63 54 50 48, 57, 59, 64 47 19 22 25 24 26 23 39, 41 40 33 38, 40, 51, 54, 57, 60, 64 78 36 34, 77 34, 37 34, 36 56 53 BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 FBTEST REFERENCE MANUAL 101 (102) 7.1 Menu Index Adjustment Menu Bandgap Calibration Menu Board Test Menu Channels Menu Connections Menu Edit Loader Parameters Menu EEPROM Display Editor Menu Frequency Mode Menu Main Menu Measurement Setup Menu Modem Operation Menu Modem Parameters Menu Number Mode Menu OCXO Age Adjustment Menu PF Output Power Calibration Menu PF Reflected Power Calibration Menu Radio Calibration Menu Radio Control and Calibration Menu Radio Register Editor Menu Read Parameters from FLASH Menu Reference Oscillator OCXO Calibration Menu RSSI Calibration Menu Select/Unselect Boards Menu Set Test Parameters for FCB Menu Set Test Parameters for FMB Menu Set Test Parameters for FNB Menu Set Test Parameters for FPB Menu Set Test Parameters for FRB Menu Set Time Menu Setup Menu Status Overview Menu Store Parameters in FLASH Menu TCXO Modulation Calibration Menu Temperature Sensor Calibration Menu Transceiver Control and Presentation Menu Transceiver Setup Menu VCO Modulation Calibration Menu X.25 Parameters Menu BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06 72 44 17 89 92 79 67 35 15 37 77 84 33 73 51 54 42 30 71 94 48 65 19 21 24 23 25 22 29 75 78 95 61 46 39 32 57 88, 91 102 (102) BRU3 MANUAL BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 198 17-CAAA 808 288 Uen Rev H, 2003-06-06

 

 

BRU3 Mechanical Design Contents 1 Hardware Description.................................................................................. 3 Introduction ...................................................................................... 3 1.1 2 Base Radio Unit 3 - BRU3 .......................................................................... 4 2.1 FE Computer Board - FCB .............................................................. 6 2.2 FE Power Supply Unit - FPU........................................................... 8 2.3 FE Battery Unit 4Ah - FBU ........................................................... 11 2.4 FE Connection Board - FNB.......................................................... 13 2.5 FE Modem Board - FMB ............................................................... 17 2.6 FE Adaptation Board - FAB .......................................................... 18 2.7 FE Radio Board - FRB................................................................... 20 2.8 FE Filter Module - FFM................................................................. 23 2.9 FE Heating Unit - FHU .................................................................. 27 2.10 Cables............................................................................................. 29 2.10.1 FE Cable Set - FCS, TSRA 909 0105................................. 29 2.10.2 FE Logic Cable, TSRA 903 0420....................................... 31 2.10.3 FE Console Cable, TSRA 902 0190 ................................... 32 2.10.4 FE Modem Connection Cable RS 232, TSRA 904 63 ....... 33 2.10.5 FE Modem Connection Cable RS 422, TSRA 904 64 ....... 34 2.10.6 FE Alarm Cable, TSRA 905 44 .......................................... 35 2.10.7 FE Telephone Line Connection Cable, TSRA 905 45........ 36 BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1/1551-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-02-11 BRU3 MANUAL The contents of this document are subject to revision without notice due to continued progress in methodology, design and manufacturing. Ericsson shall have no liability for any errors or damages of any kind resulting from the use of this document. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1/1551-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-02-11 BRU3 MECHANICAL DESIGN 3 (36) 1 Hardware Description 1.1 Introduction This section describes the hardware units included in the Base Radio Unit BRU3. The section is not intended to be used as a service handbook, but it gives the user a good knowledge of the hardware structure of the Base Radio Unit. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1/1551-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-02-11 4 (36) BRU3 MANUAL 2 Base Radio Unit 3 - BRU3 Designation Frequency band BRU39xx BRU38xx BRU34xx 900 MHz 800 MHz 400 MHz For a list of all frequency bands, please refer to the Introduction and Product Specification section in the BRU3 - General module. Design BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1/1551-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-02-11 BRU3 MECHANICAL DESIGN 5 (36) Pos Included unit 39xx Art.No. 38xx 34xx The BRU3 consists of two main mechanical parts:

(1)

(5) FBF - FE Case Bottom Frame SXKA 138 0054/2 SXKA 138 0054/2 SXKA 138 0054 FTF - FE Case Top Frame SXKA 138 0053/2 SXKA 138 0053/2 SXKA 138 0053 The FBF includes:

(11) FNB - FE Connection Board ROAA 219 713 ROAA 219 713 ROAA 219 713

(2)

(3)

(4) FPU - FE Power Supply Unit BMKA 071 003/3 BMKA 071 003/3 BMKA 071 003/1 FBU - FE Battery Unit BKBA 071 001/1 BKBA 071 001/1 BKBA 071 001/1 FAB - FE Adaptation Board ROAA 219 714/1 ROAA 219 714/6 ROAA 219 714/n n: Please refer to respective variant under 2.6 FE Adaptation Board - FAB in this section. The FTF is hinged to the bottom part and includes:

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(10)

(11) FCB - FE Computer Board ROAA 219 711 ROAA 219 711 ROAA 219 711 FMB - FE Modem Board ROAA 219 712 ROAA 219 712 ROAA 219 712 FRB - FE Radio Board ROA 117 2005 or ROA 117 9842/1 ROA 117 9842/3 ROA 117 2015/n FFM - FE Filter Module KRF 201 xxx/m KRF 201 xxx/m KRF 201 xxx/m FHU - FE Heating Unit BPCA 801 01/1 BPCA 801 01/1 BPC 105 03/1 FCS - FE Cable Set TSRA 909 0105 TSRA 909 0105 TSRA 909 0105 n: Please refer to respective variant under 2.7 FE Radio Board - FRB in this section m: Please refer to respective variant under 2.8 FE Filter Module - FFM in this section. Dimensions 38xx and 39xx 34xx Width:

Height:

Depth:

Weight:

Note!

472 mm 345 mm 202 mm 18 kg 472 mm 345 mm 202 mm 19 kg For technical data on the BRU3, please refer to the Introduction and Product Specification section in the BRU3 - General module. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1/1551-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-02-11 6 (36) BRU3 MANUAL 2.1 FE Computer Board - FCB Designation FE Computer Board, FCB Connectors Pos. Connector P1 P2 P3 P4 P5

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) LEDs Pos.

(6)

(7) Switches Pos.

(8)

(9) Article number ROAA 219 711 Connection Radio Connector Connection Board Connector Power Connector Modem Connector Expansion Connector LED Colour Function Watchdog alarm Red Lit when the Watchdog is released Status indicator Yellow Lit when the processor is operating OK Type SW 1, Press button SW 2, DIP-Switch, 4-pole Function Reset button Selection between telephone modem

(not applicable in some BRU3 variants), balanced serial interface and unbalanced serial interface BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1/1551-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-02-11 BRU3 MECHANICAL DESIGN 7 (36) Design BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1/1551-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-02-11 8 (36) BRU3 MANUAL 2.2 FE Power Supply Unit - FPU Pos. Designation Article number 34xx: FE Power Supply Unit; FPU BMKA 071 003/1 38xx: FE Power Supply Unit; FPU BMKA 071 003/3 39xx: FE Power Supply Unit; FPU BMKA 071 002/3

(1)

(1)

(1) 34xx: FE Power Supply Board, FPB ROAA 117 2165 38xx: FE Power Supply Board, FPB ROAA 117 2165 39xx: FE Power Supply Board, FPB ROAA 219 710 Connections Pos. Connector Connection

(2)

(3)

(4) J1, Mains input connector 120/230 V AC input to the FPU J2, Power output connector 120/230 V AC power output to the FHU J3, Output connector Power output to the FBU Switches Pos. Switch Function

(5)

(6) S1, Main Switch AC Power supply ON/OFF switch S2, Battery Switch Battery backup power supply ON/OFF switch BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1/1551-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-02-11 BRU3 MECHANICAL DESIGN 9 (36) Colour Function Yellow Yellow Red Incoming 120/230 AC OK

+14 V DC to the radio unit and DC/DC modules OK Sum alarm, unspecified power failure in FPU LEDs Pos. LED L1, Mains L2, +14V L3, Error

(7)

(8)

(9) Fuses Pos. Fuse Type Function

(10)

(11)

(12) F1 F2 F3 6.3AT, Glass fuse, 5*20 mm Power to FHU 6.3AT, Glass fuse, 5*20 mm Power to FHU and FPB 6.3AF, Glass fuse, 5*20 mm Power to/from FBU BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1/1551-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-02-11 10 (36) Design BRU3 MANUAL BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1/1551-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-02-11 BRU3 MECHANICAL DESIGN 11 (36) 2.3 FE Battery Unit 4Ah - FBU Designation Article number FBU - FE Battery Unit BKBA 071 001/1 Included units Article number Pos.

(1)

(2) Connections Pos.

(3) Designation FE Battery Packet BKCA 509 0001/01 Battery cassette SXAA 138 0426 Connector Type Connection Power supply Molex Power Connection BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1/1551-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-02-11 12 (36) Design BRU3 MANUAL BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1/1551-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-02-11 BRU3 MECHANICAL DESIGN 13 (36) 2.4 FE Connection Board - FNB Designation FNB - FE Connection Board Connections Article number ROAA 219 713 Pos. Connector Type P1, CONSOLE Port 9-pole, DSUB Male P2, ALARM Port 9-pole, DSUB Female P3, TEL Connection 9-pole, DSUB Female P4, RS232-MOX Port 25-pole, DSUB Male P5, RS422-MOX Port 25-pole, DSUB Male P6, Connection FNB - FCB

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) Design BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1/1551-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-02-11 14 (36) BRU3 MANUAL Pin ID P1, CONSOLE Port Pin Signal Interface/function Chassis GND RS232 / Receive data to FNB RS232 / Transmit data from FNB RS232 / high signal 12ohm rel. chassis GND / Signal GND RS232 / State signal to FNB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 GND RXB TXB

+12V SGND

BOOT

P2, ALARM Port Pin Signal Interface/function VCC_EXT

+12V, Max. 40mA, serial res. 100ohm / Port 1 AL1+

AL1-

GND_EXT GND VCC_EXT AL2+

AL2-

Max. 10mA, serial resistance 8kohm / Port 1 Max. 10mA, serial resistance 8kohm / Port 1 0V, serial resistance 100ohm / Port 1 Chassis GND

+12V, max. 40mA, serial resistance 100ohm / Port 2 Max. 10mA, serial resistance 8kohm / Port 2 Max. 10mA, serial resistance 8kohm / Port 2 GND_EXT 0V, serial resistance 100ohm / Port 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 P3, TEL Connection Pin Signal Interface/function 1 2 3 4 5 LRA LRB LT/2WA LT/2WB

4-wire leased line Rx part A 4-wire leased line Rx part B 4-wire leased line Tx part A or 2-wire part A 4-wire leased line Tx part B or 2-wire part B BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1/1551-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-02-11 BRU3 MECHANICAL DESIGN 15 (36) Pin Signal Interface/function 2-wire switched line part A 2-wire switched line part B 6 7 8 9 SWA SWB

P4, RS232-MOX Port Pin Signal Interface/function 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 GND TXA RXA RTS

SGND DCD

TC

RC

DTR

ETC

Chassis GND RS232 / Transmit data from FNB RS232 / Receive data to FNB RS232 / Request to send from FNB 12ohm rel. chassis GND / Signal GND RS232 / Data carrier to FNB RS232 / Transmit clock 114 to FNB RS232 / Receive clock to FNB RS232 / Data terminal ready form FNB RS232 / Transmit clock 113 from FNB BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1/1551-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-02-11 16 (36) BRU3 MANUAL P5, RS422-MOX Port Pin Signal Interface/function 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 GND TX_A RX_A RTS_A

SGND DCD_A DCD_B

TX_B RX_B RTS_B TC_B TC_A

RC_A

RC_B DTR_A

DTR_B ETC_B ETC_A

Chassis GN RS422 / Transmit data inverted from FNB RS422 / Receive data inverted to FNB RS422 / Request to send inverted from FNB 12ohm rel. chassis GND / signal GND RS422 / Data carrier detect inverted to FNB RS422 / Data carrier detect not inverted to FNB RS422 / Transmit data not inverted from FNB RS422 / Receive data not inverted to FNB RS422 / Request to send not inverted from FNB RS422 / Transmit clock 114 not inverted to FNB RS422 / Transmit clock 114 inverted to FNB RS422 / Receive clock inverted to FNB RS422 / Receive clock not inverted to FNB RS422 / Data terminal ready inverted from FNB RS422 / Data terminal ready not inverted RS422 / Transmit clock 113 not inverted to FNB RS422 / Transmit clock 113 inverted to FNB BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1/1551-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-02-11 BRU3 MECHANICAL DESIGN 17 (36) 2.5 FE Modem Board - FMB The modem equipment consists of two separate boards:

Designation FMB - FE Modem Board Connections Article number ROAA 219 712 Connector Connection P1, FMB interface Connector FMB interface towards the FAB Pos.

(1) Design BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1/1551-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-02-11 18 (36) BRU3 MANUAL 2.6 FE Adaptation Board - FAB Designation Article Number FAB - FE Adaptation Board 39xx ROAA 219 714/1 38xx ROAA 219 714/6 34xx ROAA 219 714/2 34xx ROAA 219 714/3 34xx ROAA 219 714/5 Connections Pos.

(1)

(2) Connector Connection P1, Modem connector Modem connection to FMB P2, Telephone connector Telephone connection BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1/1551-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-02-11 BRU3 MECHANICAL DESIGN 19 (36) Design BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1/1551-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-02-11 20 (36) BRU3 MANUAL 2.7 FE Radio Board - FRB Designation Article Number FRB - FE Radio Board 39xx ROA 117 2005 39xx ROA 117 9842/1 38xx ROA 117 9842/3 34xx ROA 117 2015/1 34xx ROA 117 2015/2 34xx ROA 117 2015/3 Connections Pos.

(1)

(2) Connector Type Connection RX TX Coax Antenna input Coax Antenna output BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1/1551-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-02-11 BRU3 MECHANICAL DESIGN 21 (36) Design, 39xx ROA 117 2005 Design, 38xx ROA 117 9842/3, 39xx ROA 117 9842/1 BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1/1551-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-02-11 A v e R 7 9 1 1 0 4 E Z L

2 8 8 2

1 2 22 (36) BRU3 MANUAL Design, 34xx ROA 117 2015/2 Design, 34xx ROA 117 8896 2 A 4 0 2 1 0 4 E Z L

4 2 4 1 9 1

1 BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1/1551-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-02-11 BRU3 MECHANICAL DESIGN 23 (36) 2.8 FE Filter Module - FFM Designation FFM - FE Filter Module Article Number 39xx-D KRF 201 129/1 39xx-T KRF 201 165/1 38xx-D KRF 102 137/1 34xx-T KRF 201 124/1 34xx-T KRF 201 124/2 34xx-T KRF 201 124/3 34xx-T KRF 201 124/4 34xx-T KRF 201 124/5 34xx-T KRF 201 124/7 34xx-D KRF 201 164/1 34xx-D KRF 201 164/2 34xx-D KRF 201 164/3 34xx-D KRF 201 164/4 34xx-D KRF 201 164/5 34xx-D KRF 201 164/7 BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1/1551-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-02-11 24 (36) BRU3 MANUAL Included Units Pos.

(1)

(2)

(3) Designation Mounting plate RXBP-Filter (Duplex) TXBP-Filter (Duplex) Connector RX TX RX RX/TX Type Coax Coax Coax Coax Connection Antenna input to FRB Antenna output to FRB Antenna output Antenna connector Pos.

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7) Design BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1/1551-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-02-11 BRU3 MECHANICAL DESIGN 25 (36) Design BP 800 MHz/

BP 900 MHz Connected to FRB DPX 800 MHz/

BP 900 MHz Connected to FRB BP 900 MHz Connected to FRB DPX 900 MHz Connected to FRB TX 21 TXBP FILTER TX TX 21 TXBP FILTER TX TX 21 TXBP FILTER TX 21 TXBP FILTER RX RX RX TX RX TX RX RX 22 RXBP FILTER 22 RXBP FILTER RX 22 RXBP FILTER RX 22 RXBP FILTER B v e R 7 9 1 1 0 4 E Z L

2 8 8 2

1 BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1/1551-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-02-11 26 (36) Design BRU3 MANUAL BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1/1551-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-02-11 BRU3 MECHANICAL DESIGN 27 (36) 2.9 FE Heating Unit - FHU Designation Article number FE Heating Unit, FHU BPCA 801 01/1 (120/230 V AC, 300 W) BPC 105 02 (120/230 V AC,600 W) BPC 105 03/1 (230 V AC,600 W) BPC 105 03/2 (120 V AC,600 W) Connector Pos. Designation

(1) Input Connector for Heater Design FHB - BPC 105 02 BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1/1551-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-02-11 28 (36) BRU3 MANUAL Design FHB - BPCA 801 01/1 Design FHB - BPC 105 03/1 and /2 BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1/1551-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-02-11 BRU3 MECHANICAL DESIGN 29 (36) 2.10 Cables 2.10.1 FE Cable Set - FCS, TSRA 909 0105 FE Computer Board, FCB - FE Power Supply Board, FPB - FE Battery Unit, FBU BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1/1551-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-02-11 30 (36) BRU3 MANUAL BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1/1551-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-02-11 BRU3 MECHANICAL DESIGN 31 (36) 2.10.2 FE Logic Cable, TSRA 903 0420 FE Computer Board, FCB - FE Connection Board, FNB PA 1 26 25 50 PB 1 26 25 50 FE COMPUTER BOARD (FCB) FE CONNECTION BOARD (FNB) Contact PA, pin nr Contact PB, pin nr Contact PA, pin nr Contact PB, pin nr SWT/RA 1 LLTX/2WA 3 LLTX/SWB 4 LLRXA 5 LLRXB 6 RLC1 7 RLC2 8 GND 10 D_RXD 12 D_DCD* 14 RS422_EN* 16 VCC 17 VCC 18 CND 19 VCC 21 TXDB 23 GND 25 white brown green yellow grey pink blue red black violet grey-pink red-blue white-green brown-green white-yellow yellow-brown white-grey grey-brown white-pink pink-brown white-blue brown-blue white-red brown-red white-black 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 12 14 15 16 17 18 19 21 23 25 AGND 26 CL 28 CC1 29 AGND 30 AGND 31 RLC3 32 RING 33 VCC 35 GND 37 GND 39 GND 41 GND 42 VCC 43 VCC 44 GND 46 EXT_ALM1* 48 GND 50 grey-green yellow-grey pink-green yellow-pink green-blue yellow-blue green-red yellow-red green-black yellow-black grey-blue pink-blue grey-red pink-red grey-black pink-black blue-black red-black white brown green yellow grey pink brown-black 26 28 29 30 31 32 33 35 37 39 40 41 42 43 44 46 48 50 12/LZE 401 26 R2 BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1/1551-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-02-11 32 (36) BRU3 MANUAL 2.10.3 FE Console Cable, TSRA 902 0190 BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1/1551-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-02-11 BRU3 MECHANICAL DESIGN 33 (36) 2.10.4 FE Modem Connection Cable RS 232, TSRA 904 63 BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1/1551-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-02-11 34 (36) BRU3 MANUAL 2.10.5 FE Modem Connection Cable RS 422, TSRA 904 64 BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1/1551-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-02-11 BRU3 MECHANICAL DESIGN 35 (36) 2.10.6 FE Alarm Cable, TSRA 905 44 BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1/1551-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-02-11 36 (36) BRU3 MANUAL 2.10.7 FE Telephone Line Connection Cable, TSRA 905 45 BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1/1551-ANNA 805 08 Uen Rev H, 2003-02-11

 

 

BRU3 Logic and Radio System Contents 1 General ........................................................................................................ 3 2 Hardware Units............................................................................................ 4 3 Hardware Modules ...................................................................................... 6 3.1 Logic and Modem Equipment.......................................................... 6 3.2 Radio Unit Modules ......................................................................... 7 3.3 Power Supply Equipment................................................................. 7 4 Modem Equipment ...................................................................................... 8 4.1 Telephone Modem Boards ............................................................. 10 4.1.1 V.11 and V.28 Serial Interfaces.......................................... 10 4.1.2 Interface signals .................................................................. 11 4.1.3 Connector............................................................................ 12 5 Logic Equipment ....................................................................................... 13 5.1 Synchronous Serial Circuit ............................................................ 14 5.2 Main CPU including Memory........................................................ 14 5.3 Dual Port Memory.......................................................................... 14 5.4 Signal Processor Unit with Memory .............................................. 15 5.5 Console Ports ................................................................................. 15 5.6 LEDs .............................................................................................. 15 5.7 Reset Button ................................................................................... 16 6.1.1 6.1.2 6.1.3 6.1.4 6 Radio System............................................................................................. 17 6.1 Radio Parameters ........................................................................... 18 Frequency Band 400 MHz (HRB 104 43/xx)..................... 18 Frequency Band 800 MHz (HRB 104 43/C20) .................. 19 Frequency Band 900 MHz (HRB 104 43/C2, C4, C5, C6) 19 Frequency Band 900 MHz (HRB 104 43/C7, C8).............. 20 6.2 Radio Units..................................................................................... 21 6.2.1 Transmitter.......................................................................... 21 6.2.2 Modulation Synthesizer ...................................................... 22 6.2.3 Receiver .............................................................................. 22 6.2.4 Reference Oscillator ........................................................... 22 BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 155 16-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-02-07 BRU3 MANUAL 6.2.5 Radio Control Circuit ..........................................................23 Filter ....................................................................................23 6.2.6 7 Power Supply Equipment...........................................................................24 7.1 Power Supply Unit..........................................................................25 7.1.1 AC/DC Module ...................................................................25 7.1.2 DC/DC Module ...................................................................25 7.1.3 Battery Charge.....................................................................26 7.1.4 DC Alarms...........................................................................26 7.1.5 Lightning Protection ............................................................26 7.1.6 Connectors...........................................................................26 7.1.7 Switches...............................................................................26 7.1.8 LEDs....................................................................................27 7.1.9 Fuses ....................................................................................27 7.2 Battery Unit.....................................................................................27 8 Heating unit ................................................................................................28 9 BRU3 Connections.....................................................................................29 I/O CONNECTIONS......................................................................31 9.1 10 Software Description..................................................................................32 10.1 PREBOOT FE.................................................................................32 10.2 BOOT FE ........................................................................................33 10.3 MAIN FE ........................................................................................33 10.4 FBTEST ..........................................................................................33 The contents of this document are subject to revision without notice due to continued progress in methodology, design and manufacturing. Ericsson shall have no liability for any errors or damages of any kind resulting from the use of this document. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 155 16-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-02-07 BRU3 LOGIC AND RADIO SYSTEM 3 (34) 1 General The Base Radio Unit 3 (BRU3) is a complete one-channel radio base station which uses 8 kbps data signalling and is designed for the 400, 800 and 900 MHz frequency band. The BRU3, which may be installed outdoors and indoors, is a link between the mobile terminals (MOB) and the area exchanges (MOX) in the Mobitex Network. The BRU3 includes main computer, internal power supply, internal heating, alarm handling, radio modem, radio transceiver, radio filters and I/O connections. Optional line modem and battery unit may be included. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 155 16-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-02-07 4 (34) BRU3 MANUAL 2 Hardware Units The BRU3 consists of two main mechanical parts:

FE Case Bottom Frame FE Case Top Frame The FBF comprises:

Weather-protected throughputs for the cabling FE Connection Board FE Power Supply Unit FE Battery Unit, for power supply backup FE Adaptation Board FBF FTF

(1)

(5) FNB

(11) FPU FBU FAB

(2)

(3)

(4) The FTF is hinged to the bottom part and works as a cover as well as a cooling flange, offering good thermal management for the BRU3. The FTF comprises:

FE Computer Board FE Modem Board FE Radio Board FE Filter Module FE Heating Unit FCB FMB FRB

(6)

(7)

(8) FFM (9) FHU

(10) BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 155 16-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-02-07 BRU3 LOGIC AND RADIO SYSTEM 5 (34) Figure 1 Base Radio Unit (BRU3). BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 155 16-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-02-07 6 (34) BRU3 MANUAL 3 Hardware Modules The BRU3 hardware is shown in Figure 1 Base Radio Unit (BRU3).. The BRU3 Logic and Modem Equipment, Radio System and the Power Supply Equipment are housed in one single cabinet. The following subsections briefly describe the modules that are directly involved in the traffic flow and signal processing to be outlined below. Other hardware is described further on in this section. MOX Port LINE INTER FACE Console Port COMPUTER PART RADIO PART POWER SUPPLY UNIT 1/LZEA 801 350 R1 Figure 2 Hardware modules. 3.1 Logic and Modem Equipment The Logic and Modem Equipment contains the following boards:

FCB FE Computer Board FMB FE Modem Board FAB FE Adaptation Board BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 155 16-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-02-07 BRU3 LOGIC AND RADIO SYSTEM 7 (34) 3.2 Radio Unit Modules The BRU3 Radio Units contains the following boards:

FRB FE Radio Board FFM FE Filter Module 3.3 Power Supply Equipment FPU FE Power Supply Unit FBU FE Battery Unit FHU FE Heating Unit FHB FE Heating Board FHE FE Heating Element BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 155 16-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-02-07 8 (34) BRU3 MANUAL 4 Modem Equipment 25 pol D-sub 9 pol D-sub 9 pol D-sub 9 16 V24/V28 V24/V11 2+4 DAA Adaptation Board Select V28 Select V24 Select V11 To Modem Console Boot Source Select 2+3 Filter and OVP Console/

Boot Source Select 8/LZEA 801 350 Figure 3 Line interface block diagram. There are three alternative line interfaces for connection to a MOX:

telephone modem V.32 balanced serial interface V.24/V.11 (RS422) unbalanced serial interface V.24/V.28 (RS232) BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 155 16-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-02-07

BRU3 LOGIC AND RADIO SYSTEM 9 (34) The choice between telephone modem, balanced serial interface and unbalanced serial interface, is made by setting Switch 2 (SW2) as follows. To locate Switch 2, please refer to FE Computer Board - FCB in the BRU3 Mechanical Design section. Switch 2 SW2:1 SW2:2 SW2:3 Comments Open or closed Open Closed Open Open Open Other alternatives not allowed. SW2:4 Open Open Closed Closed Comments OEM Strap V.32bis V.28 (RS232) V.11 (RS422) Data communication between a base station and an area exchange (MOX) is using data connections with a X.25 protocol. X.25 protocol can use either a leased line or a packet switched data network. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 155 16-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-02-07 10 (34) BRU3 MANUAL 4.1 Telephone Modem Boards The telephone modem, which supports the CCITT V.32 and V.32bis standards, consists of two separate boards, the FE Modem Board V.32 (FMB) and the FE Adaptation Board (FAB). Depending on national requirements issued by the telecommunications administration in your country, different versions of the FAB may be used. Also, depending on the BRU3 variant, the telephone modem may not be installed. Two-wire leased, four-wire leased or switched lines are used for data transmission. The maximum transmission rate is 14 400 bits/sec. The modem is connected to the computer part via a synchronous serial circuit. Asynchronously transferred AT/Hayes commands are used for modem configuration and control. The software used by the modem is installed from the main processor and stored in a memory. The FMB does not include a reset button. To reset the FMB and FAB, a power off-operation is necessary. 4.1.1 V.11 and V.28 Serial Interfaces The FE Connection board (FNB) includes conversion circuits for V.11 and V.28 standards for the serial interfaces. It also includes voltage protection and filters for the modem, the V.11, the V.28 and the console ports. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 155 16-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-02-07 BRU3 LOGIC AND RADIO SYSTEM 11 (34) 4.1.2 Interface signals The following table shows the signals included in the interface. The same signals appear both for V.11 and V.28. I/O Signal CCITT V.24 Circuit No. Description GND SG TD RD RTS DTR DCD ETC TC RC 101 102 103 104 105 108 109 113 114 115 Protective Ground Signal Ground Transmit Data Receive Data Request to Send Data Terminal Ready Data Carrier Detect External Transmit Clock Transmit Clock Receive Clock BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 155 16-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-02-07 12 (34) BRU3 MANUAL 4.1.3 Connector A 25p d-sub connector is used for both V.11 and V.28. The following table shows the signals used:

Pin Connector P4 V.28

(RS232) Connector P5 V.11 (RS422) Protective Ground (101) Protective Ground (101) TD (103) RD (104) RTS (105)

GND (102) DCD (109)

TC (114)

RC (115)

ETC (113)

TD- (103) RD- (104) RTS- (105)

GND (102) DCD- (109) DCD+ (109)

TD+ (103) RD+ (104) RTS+ (105) TC+ (114) TC- (114)

RC- (115)

RC+ (115)

ETC+ (113) ETC- (113)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 155 16-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-02-07 BRU3 LOGIC AND RADIO SYSTEM 13 (34) 5 Logic Equipment CPU68030 19.2MHz DRAM FLASH Watchdog TIMER Serial I/O Parallel I/O Temp. Sensor Dual Port Memory OTTAWA 19.2MHz FNB FMB FPU SRAM 64Kb DSP Radio Interface Figure 4 MAIN computer block diagram. 2/LZE 401 02 R2 The FE Computer Board (FCB) contains the main computer block which consists of:

Synchronous serial circuit

Main CPU including memory

Memory for main CPU

Dual port memory

Signal processor unit (SPU) with memory

Console ports

LEDs for Watchdog alarm and status indication

Reset button

Switch 2 (SW2) for setting line interface alternative. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 155 16-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-02-07 14 (34) BRU3 MANUAL 5.1 Synchronous Serial Circuit An integrated circuit, Z16C35, is used as a synchronous serial circuit with Direct Memory Access (DMA). The integrated circuit contains two serial ports. Communication drivers are available in the Mobitex SW. 5.2 Main CPU including Memory The main CPU consists of a MC68EC030-25RP running at 19.2 MHz. The DRAM is used for data storage and program execution. The Flash PROM is used to store the system software. There is also a Boot Flash-PROM. The program file for this area is loaded to the Flash-PROM via the console port using a VT100-compatible portable PC. (For more information, please refer to Software Commissioning Procedure in the Commissioning Procedure section of the BRU3 - General module.) There are no EPROM, EEPROM or SRAM for the main CPU. The main CPU also comprises the following functionalities:

Watchdog

Parallel inputs for alarms.

Parallel outputs for LEDs and other controls.

Clock-tick generator, fed by the reference oscillator. 5.3 Dual Port Memory The dual port memory transfers data between the main CPU and the Signal processing unit (SPU). The size is 2Kbit * 16. The memory is implemented in a dual port memory chip. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 155 16-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-02-07 BRU3 LOGIC AND RADIO SYSTEM 15 (34) 5.4 Signal Processor Unit with Memory The TMS320C25 Signal processor unit is used for modulation, demodulation and radio control. The SPU contains an 8 kbit * 16 SRAM with 25 ns access time. No EPROM or FLASH is included. The BOOT program is loaded to the dual port memory by the main CPU. 5.5 Console Ports The FCB contains two ports for serial communication, both handled by the integrated circuit Z16C35. Port A implies complete synchronous functionality, and also, limited modem support. By the FNB and FMB, this port can be used for V.24/V.28, V.24/V.11 or V.24/V.32. Port B is intended for the use of a console via the FNB with the V.24 signals, RX and TX. 5.6 LEDs LED Colour Function Status indicator Yellow Lit when the processor is operating OK. Watchdog alarm Red Lit when the Watchdog is released. If so, a reset pulse is generated. The Watchdog LED is lit and the signal WDSTATUS, read by the CPU, peaks. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 155 16-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-02-07 16 (34) BRU3 MANUAL 5.7 Reset Button To enable a hardware reset of the FCB and the FMB (Modem Board), and also, the FRB (FE Radio Board), the FCB is equipped with a reset button located next to the LED Status indicator. To reach the button for a reset operation, use a long and narrow, non-conductive object (pen or similar). A reset of the FCB may be generated for the following reasons:

1. Power-on reset: The reset is generated at power-on, and also, when a power drop occurs. 2. Switch reset: The reset is activated when the reset button is pressed. 3. Watchdog reset. The reset is activated by the watchdog function if not maintained. 4. CPU reset: The reset is performed by the CPU when a reset instruction is executed. In this specific case, no reset of the CPU itself is carried out. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 155 16-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-02-07 BRU3 LOGIC AND RADIO SYSTEM 17 (34) 6 Radio System z H k 2 4 i s s R r e x M i p m A z H k 0 5 4 r e x M i p m A r e t l i f l a t

X p m A r e x M i l e o p 3 A N L a n n e n A t 6 2 1

z H k 2 9 4 11/LZEA 801 350 R3 r e t l i f x e p u D l r P f P l a n o i t c e r i D l r e p u o C z H M 5 2 7 7

. z H M 8 8 7

. 6 x 2

1 z H M 4

. 8 3 z H M 4 2 8

8 1 8 O C V T E D r e t l i F r e f f u B r e t l i F c i h t n y S i r e z s e h t n y S x R z H M 8

. 2 1 O X C O t n o c c s O p m e T c s D i i s s R c I a n e e H l r e w o p x T O C V d o M c x o t d o M n o r P f P x T t r o a o s I l r e w o P l o r t n o C r e t t i m s n a r T O X C T p m a

P O r e t l i F c I t h n y S T E D r e f f u B r e f f u B r e t l i F c I h t n y S p m A r e w o P O C V i r e z s e h t n y S X T T E D y r o m e M i o d a R

c g o L i e c a f r e t n I X T B T S S X R B T S S A T A D S K L C S D O M B T S S K L C F E R 0 A

8 A 0 D

7 D D A E R I E T R W I G S D O M B T S D O M Y D R D A 0 L E S 1 L E S D A E R Figure 5 Radio system block diagram. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 155 16-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-02-07 N E E T R W I T A B V 18 (34) BRU3 MANUAL 6.1 Radio Parameters Radio data transmission rate 8 kbps Modulation Traffic mode Channel bandwidth modified GMSK duplex 12.5 kHz Sensitivity

-117 dBm at 1% BER 6.1.1 Frequency Band 400 MHz (HRB 104 43/xx) Frequency range Frequency stability Antenna output power Antenna impedance Tx: within the 400 MHz range. Rx: within the 400 MHz range. 0.2 6 ppm W Duplex filter 6 50 W TxBP filter ohms For a list of all Product Numbers, please refer to the Introduction and Product Specification section in the BRU3 - General module. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 155 16-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-02-07 BRU3 LOGIC AND RADIO SYSTEM 19 (34) 6.1.2 Frequency Band 800 MHz (HRB 104 43/C20) Frequency range Duplex spacing Frequency stability Antenna output power Antenna impedance Tx: 864.0 - 870.0 MHz Rx: 819.0 - 825.0 MHz 45 MHz ppm 0.1 6 W Duplex filter 6 50 W TxBP filter ohms For a list of all Product Numbers, please refer to the Introduction and Product Specification section in the BRU3 - General module. 6.1.3 Frequency Band 900 MHz (HRB 104 43/C2, C4, C5, C6) Frequency range Duplex spacing Frequency stability Antenna output power Antenna impedance Tx: 935.0125 - 940.9875 MHz Rx: 896.0125 - 901.9875 MHz 39 MHz ppm 0.1 3 W Duplex filter 3 50 W TxBP filter ohms For a list of all Product Numbers, please refer to the Introduction and Product Specification section in the BRU3 - General module. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 155 16-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-02-07 20 (34) BRU3 MANUAL 6.1.4 Frequency Band 900 MHz (HRB 104 43/C7, C8) Frequency range Duplex spacing Frequency stability Antenna output power Antenna impedance Tx: 935.0125 - 940.9875 MHz Rx: 896.0125 - 901.9875 MHz 39 MHz ppm 0.1 6 W Duplex filter 6 50 W TxBP filter ohms For a list of all Product Numbers, please refer to the Introduction and Product Specification section in the BRU3 - General module. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 155 16-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-02-07 BRU3 LOGIC AND RADIO SYSTEM 21 (34) 6.2 Radio Units The BRU3 Radio Unit is operated locally on site by using a VT-100 compatible terminal, e.g., a portable PC, and FB-TEST. By using FBTEST, it is possible to set TX and RX frequencies, transmitter power, alarm levels, parameters etc. The BRU3 is designed for duplex traffic 8 kbit GMSK modulation. The radio unit consists of the following main parts:

transmitter including synthesizer receiver including synthesizer

modulation synthesizer reference oscillator radio control circuit

memory for radio parameters filter. 6.2.1 Transmitter The modulated output signal to the transmitter is generated by the transmitter synthesizer. The synthesizer output signal is isolated from the transmitter power amplifier by two buffer amplifiers. These buffer amplifiers will prevent the power amplifiers from altering the signal when the transmitter power is switched on. The power amplifier supplies the desired power level from the transmitter. An isolating device after the power module will suppress unwanted external signals from generating intermodulation products with the transmitted signal. A directional coupler is used to measure the output power from the transmitter and the reflected power from the antenna. The output power from the transmitter is controlled by an ALC (Automatic Level Control). The modulation of the transmitter is achieved using a two point modulation method. The VCO is modulated directly with a signal from the radio control integrated circuit. The other modulated signal is applied to the reference frequency input of the transmitter synthesizer. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 155 16-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-02-07

22 (34) BRU3 MANUAL By using this modulation method, it is possible to obtain a fast settling time for the transmitter synthesizer and maintain a low cut-off frequency for the GMSK modulated signal. 6.2.2 Modulation Synthesizer A modulated reference signal to the transmitter synthesizer reference is generated using an extra reference synthesizer. The modulation signal is added to the control voltage of the Voltage controlled crystal oscillator (VCXO). In order to keep the high frequence accuracy of the reference oscillator, the VCXO is phase-locked to this signal. This loop is designed to be very slow in order to get a low cut-off frequency for the modulated signal. 6.2.3 Receiver The input signal from the antenna is filtered by a duplex filter, then amplified in a Low Noise Amplifier (LNA). Further filtering is obtained in a ceramic filter after the LNA. The signal is down-converted to 77.25 MHz in a double balanced high-level mixer. A Local Oscillator (LO) signal to the mixer is generated by the receiver synthesizer. The LO signal is filtered before it is fed into the mixer. After the mixer, the signal is amplified and filtered in a 77.25 MHz crystal filter. An IF-integrated circuit with two mixers and limiting amplifiers, are used to get the 42 kHz signal to the discriminator. Also, there is an output signal with a voltage proportional to the input signal strength (RSSI), from this circuit. The oscillator signal to the IF-section is generated from the overtones and divided signals from the reference oscillator. 6.2.4 Reference Oscillator The reference oscillator is a oven-controlled high-performance crystal oscillator. The output frequency is adjusted with an input control voltage. For information on how to adjust the reference oscillator, please refer to Software Commissioning Procedure in the Commissioning Procedure section of the BRU3 - General module. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 155 16-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-02-07 BRU3 LOGIC AND RADIO SYSTEM 23 (34) 6.2.5 Radio Control Circuit The radio is controlled by a custom-made integrated circuit. This circuit includes a digital discriminator for the receiver. Control of the radio and trimming of the modulation index of the transmitter is performed by D/A converters in the circuit. Alarm and other signals from the radio part (RSSI, Temperature, Transmitter power and Reflected power) are measured with A/D converters in this circuit. 6.2.6 Filter A high performance low loss duplex filter is used to achieve sufficient isolation between the receiver and the transmitter. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 155 16-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-02-07 24 (34) BRU3 MANUAL 7 Power Supply Equipment Figure 6 Power supply block diagram. The BRU3 power supply parts are located in the FE Case Bottom Frame (FBF). The power supply parts include the FE Power Supply Unit (FPU) and the FE Battery Unit (FBU). The FE Heating Unit (FHU) located in the FE Case Top Frame (FTF), is also regarded as a part of the power supply. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 155 16-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-02-07 BRU3 LOGIC AND RADIO SYSTEM 25 (34) The power supply parts are to be used for:

Uninterruptible power supply with distribution of 14V and 5 V DC to the FCB and FRB

Lightning protection

Fused mains feed-through to the FHU. 7.1 Power Supply Unit The FPU includes the following main parts:

AC/DC module

DC/DC module

Battery charge

DC alarm supervisor control

Lightning protection

Connectors

Switches

LEDs (Status indicators)

Fuses. 7.1.1 AC/DC Module The AC/DC module is an isolated switchmode power supply which supplies the DC/DC module, the charge control and the radio part with 14V. 7.1.2 DC/DC Module The DC/DC module is a non-isolated step-down converter that supplies the logic with 5V. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 155 16-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-02-07 26 (34) BRU3 MANUAL 7.1.3 Battery Charge The charge control circuit supplies the battery with the correct charge. The charger is charging the battery with a constant current. To protect the batteries, the current is reduced in both low and high temperature. Therefore, the charging time depends on the ambient temperature. 7.1.4 DC Alarms If either of the output voltages, 14 V or 5 V, is outside normal value, the FPU will indicate this to the FCB. This failure mode will also be indicated on the FPU. 7.1.5 Lightning Protection The FPU is equipped with a lightning protector which protects the unit according to IEC 801-5. 7.1.6 Connectors Connector Type To/From MAINS INLET POWER OUTLET TO HEATER POWER OUTLET INT. SUPPLY J1 J2 J3 120 or 230V AC power input to the FPU 120 or 230V AC power output to the FHU Power output to the FCB (5V and 14.7V) and power input from the FBU (14.7V). 7.1.7 Switches Switch Function MAINS SWITCH AC power supply on/off switch BATTERY SWITCH Battery power supply on/off switch BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 155 16-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-02-07 BRU3 LOGIC AND RADIO SYSTEM 27 (34) 7.1.8 LEDs LED Colour Function Yellow Yellow Red Lit when incoming 120 or 230V AC power is OK. Lit when 14V DC power distribution to the radio unit and the DC/DC module is OK. Sum alarm, indicates unspecified power failure in the FPU. MAINS 14V ERROR 7.1.9 Fuses Fuse Type Safety device for F1 6.3AT 250V 6.3AT 5x20 mm Mains input. F2 6.3AT 250V 6.3AT 5x20 mm F3 6.3AF 250V 6.3AF 5x20 mm Power to/from the FBU. 7.2 Battery Unit The FE Battery Unit (FBU), located in the FTF, consists of a battery pack of 12 NiCd cells 1.2V 4Ah with extended temperature range. The battery is designed to withstand continuous charge. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 155 16-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-02-07 28 (34) BRU3 MANUAL 8 Heating unit The FE Heating Unit (FHU) is located in the FE Case Top Frame (FTF). The FHU ensures that the temperature inside the BRU3 is within set limits. The unit consists of the FE Heating Board (FHB), including a heating regulator, a heating element and an overheating protection device. When the temperature on the surface of the FTF is about 25 C or lower, the FHU starts heating the BRU3. If the temperature rises to about 55 C due to a temperature regulating failure, the overheating protection will cut off the power supply to the FHU. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 155 16-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-02-07 BRU3 LOGIC AND RADIO SYSTEM 29 (34) 9 BRU3 Connections The following table gives a brief description of the BRU3 connections used. The position numbers found in the Position column refer to the corresponding position numbers in Figure 7 BRU3 external connections.. Pos. Connector Type of connector Connection To/From 3 1 2 4 5 6 7 8 MAINS INLET IEC RX ANT. TX ANT. ALT. RX/TX ANT. TNC TNC 120/230V AC input from BRU3 site power supply. Signals from the receiving antenna (RX). Signals to the transmitting antenna TX. Signals to/from the combined RX/TX antenna. P3-TELEPHONE 9p d-sub Telephone line connection. P5-RS422B 25p d-sub P4-RS232C 25p d-sub P2-ALARM 9p d-sub P1-CONSOLE 9p d-sub Connection to MOX via balanced serial interface RS422B. Connection to MOX via un-

balanced serial interface RS232C. Connection used for external alarm. Defined by the operator. Connection used for Console/

NODOP terminal. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 155 16-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-02-07 30 (34) BRU3 MANUAL Figure 7 BRU3 external connections. RX Antenna 1. TX Antenna 2. Power Connection 3. 4. Telephone Line Connection 5. Modem Connection RS232 6. Modem Connection RS422 7. 8. Alarm Connection Console Connector. Pos 2 is used as the antenna connection when a combined RX/TX antenna is used, i.e., in case an optional duplex filter is installed. The ground connection is to be found on the outside of the BRU3. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 155 16-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-02-07 BRU3 LOGIC AND RADIO SYSTEM 31 (34) 9.1 I/O CONNECTIONS 3 DMA support FNB MOX connection:

Number of ports Port locations Alternative 1 (One alternative at a time only)

---------------- Communication interface RS232D

---------------- Communication baudrate Max. 19.2 kbps Alternative 2

---------------- Communication interface RS422

---------------- Communication baudrate Max. 64 kbps Alternative 3

---------------- Communication interface V.32

---------------- Communication baudrate Max 9.6 kbps Alternative 4

---------------- Communication interface V.32bis

---------------- Communication baudrate Max 14.4 kbps Console/NODOP connection:

Number of ports Port location Communication interface Communication baudrate 1 FNB RS232D 9.6 kbps External hardware alarm connections:

Number of alarm inputs Port location One of the external alarm loops is by default strapped for the open case alarm. 2 FNB Antenna connections:

Number of connections Connector type 1 or 2 (Duplex or Bandpass filter), Located on FNB TNC, female BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 155 16-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-02-07 32 (34) BRU3 MANUAL 10 Software Description The software is divided into the following blocks:

BOOT software:

Switch software:

Miscellaneous software:

Modem application software:

PREBOOT FE BOOT FE MAIN FE FBTEST X.25 LOADER FE 10.1 PREBOOT FE The main purpose of PREBOOT is to act as a PROM programmer for the Flash PROMs mounted on the FE Computer Board (FCB). When the base station has been restarted and the main CPU starts to run, PREBOOT is the first program to be executed. When PREBOOT starts to execute it will perform a number of hardware initializations. These initializations are made to set the hardware to a defined state. Depending on the setting of a hardware jumper, PREBOOT will enter one of two different states upon start-up. In the first state, which is the normal state, PREBOOT will check whether or not the Flash-area is valid. If the area is valid, the control of execution will be handed over to the BOOT program. If the area is not valid, the second state will be entered. In the second state, PREBOOT acts as a PROM programmer. PREBOOT is now able to receive programming information from the Console Port. When the programming information has been received, it is programmed into the specified Flash-area and PREBOOT will make a CPU restart. PREBOOT offers the service of programming Flash-areas to other blocks. This service is accessed via a lookup at a fixed address in the area where PREBOOT resides. The process of receiving programming information from the Console Port is called program loading. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 155 16-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-02-07 BRU3 LOGIC AND RADIO SYSTEM 33 (34) 10.2 BOOT FE BOOT takes care of the initialization of the hardware and starts the execution of an application program. 10.3 MAIN FE The MAIN block is an application program that implements the Mobitex network services, i.e., packet switching, subscription authorization, creation of traffic logs and monitoring operation. The MAIN block also includes the handling of the radio channels. 10.4 FBTEST FBTEST is an application program that executes a number of test procedures for the base station hardware. For further information, please refer to the FBTEST Reference Manual. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 155 16-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-02-07 34 (34) BRU3 MANUAL BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 155 16-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2003-02-07

 

 

Installation Instructions Contents 1 Introduction ................................................................................................. 3 2 The BRU3 Delivery Specification............................................................... 4 2.1 Standard Installation Equipment (Provided by Ericsson) ................ 4 2.2 Pole Installation Equipment (Provided by Ericsson) ....................... 4 2.3 Storage.............................................................................................. 4 3 Preparation Before Installation.................................................................... 5 Installation Material (Provided by the Installation Contractor) ....... 5 Installation Documentation (Provided by the Installation Contractor) 3.1 3.2 6 3.3 Installation Tools (Provided by the Installation Contractor)............ 7 3.4 Site Inspection .................................................................................. 8 4 Ground Connection ..................................................................................... 9 5.1 5.2 5 Installation of the BRU3............................................................................ 10 Installation of the BRU3 on a Wall................................................ 10 Installation of the BRU3 on a Pole ................................................ 13 Installation on a Vertical Pole............................................. 13 5.2.1 5.2.2 Installation on a Horizontal Pole ........................................ 16 6 Front Cover Installation............................................................................. 19 7 Connecting the Antenna ............................................................................ 20 7.1 Connection of Separate RX and TX Antenna ................................ 20 7.2 Connecting the Combined RX/TX Antenna .................................. 22 7.3 Connecting the Antenna Connector to the Antenna Cable ............ 24 8 Connecting Network.................................................................................. 25 8.1 General ........................................................................................... 25 8.2 Connecting the Telephone Line ..................................................... 26 8.3 Connecting the RS232C Line......................................................... 29 8.4 Connecting the RS422B Line......................................................... 32 9 Connecting the Alarm................................................................................ 35 BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1531-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2001-09-28 BRU3 MANUAL 10 Connecting Power ......................................................................................40 10.1 Outdoor Installation ........................................................................40 10.2 Indoor Installation...........................................................................44 11 Before Leaving the Site..............................................................................47 The contents of this document are subject to revision without notice due to continued progress in methodology, design and manufacturing. Ericsson shall have no liability for any errors or damages of any kind resulting from the use of this document. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1531-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2001-09-28 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 3 (48) 1 Introduction This section contains the information necessary for installing a MOBITEX Base Radio Unit 3, BRU3. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1531-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2001-09-28 4 (48) BRU3 MANUAL 2 The BRU3 Delivery Specification All BRU3 deliveries are packed according to the BRU3 - Site Documentation module for the Site. Note:

The Site Documentation module is not included in the electronically published version of the Mobitex NTE Client Library but is delivered on paper together with the hardware. 2.1 Standard Installation Equipment (Provided by Ericsson) The Standard Installation Kit (FE Installation Kit - NTMA 102 22/1) comprises all the parts needed to install the BRU3 on a wall (except for the installation material). The parts included in the Standard Installation Kit are listed in the Installation Kit section. 2.2 Pole Installation Equipment (Provided by Ericsson) Together with the Standard Installation Kit, the Pole Installation Kit (FE Mounting Bracket 100 - NTMA 102 23/1) is needed to mount the BRU3 on a Horizontal or Vertical pole. Parts included in the Standard Installation Kit are listed in the Installation Kit section. 2.3 Storage The delivery package for the BRU3 meets standard ETS 300 019-1-1, class 1.3 for storage. However, it is recommended to have any plans for long term storage verified by Ericsson. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1531-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2001-09-28 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 5 (48) 3 Preparation Before Installation 3.1 Installation Material (Provided by the Installation Contractor) Make sure that the installation material required is available before the installation work is started. Check as follows:

One set of Grounding material comprising:

1 pc of Copper Grounding Cable, >=16mm (AWG 5). 1 pc of Cable Lug (Stainless) fitting the Copper Grounding Cable

>=16mm and the M8 Grounding Bolt. 1-2 pcs of Antenna Cables of type RG 214/U-60. The quantity of cables depends on whether combined or separate RX and TX Antennas are used. The cable must have an outer diameter of 6-12mm to fit the cable bushing. 4 pcs of Loose Bolt Expanders of the type HILTI HDE M10 or equivalent

(for installation of the BRU3 Base Plate on a Concrete Wall). 4 pcs of M10x70mm Bolts (for installation of the BRU3 Base Plate in the Loose Bolt Expanders of type HILTI HDE M10 on a Concrete Wall). If an equivalent Loose Bolt Expander is used, see the specification for the recommended bolt. 2 pcs of Padlocks in Stainless Steel (f or locking the BRU3 to the Base Plate), with the following shackle dimensions (please refer to Figure 1 Dimension of the BRU3 padlocks.) 1 pc of Power Connection Cable, 1.5 mm, (AWG 16) for connection to the FE Power Connection Box. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1531-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2001-09-28

6 (48) BRU3 MANUAL Figure 1 Dimension of the BRU3 padlocks. 3.2 Installation Documentation (Provided by the Installation Contractor) Make sure that the following documentation is available before the installation work is started:

BRU3 Manual (this manual). BRU3 - Site Documentation module. Note:

The Site Documentation module is not included in the electronically published version of the Mobitex NTE Client Library but is delivered on paper together with the hardware. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1531-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2001-09-28

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 7 (48) 3.3 Installation Tools (Provided by the Installation Contractor) Make sure that the following tools are available before the installation is started:

1 pc of Drilling Machine (for drilling in walls) 1 pc of 18mm Drill Bit (for drilling in walls) 1 pc of Drill Template (for drilling in walls. Made by means of the installation drawings) 1 pc of Hammer 1 pc of Spirit Level

One set of Wire-Stripping Knifes

One set of Side Cutting Pliers 1 pc of Adjustable Spanner 0-30mm

One set of Open End Wrenches, specially included:

13 mm (for M8 bolts) 16 and 17 mm (for M10 bolts) 24 and 27 mm (for the cable bushings)

One set of Socket Wrenches, specially included 13, 16 and 17mm.

One set of Screwdrivers

Crimp tool for mounting of the >=16mm (AWG 6) Copper Grounding Cable to the cable lug

Crimp tool for mounting of Antenna Cable Suhner 75 Z-0-0-15 RG 214/U-60 to the RX and TX Antenna Connector Suhner 11 TNC-50-

7-2c. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1531-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2001-09-28

8 (48) BRU3 MANUAL 3.4 Site Inspection Ensure that the BRU3 Site has been prepared according to the Site Requirements section in the BRU3 - General module:

Check that the BRU3 Site on Wall or Pole is prepared for installation.

Check that the Receiver (RX) and the Transmitter (TX) Antenna have been installed. If the BRU3 is equipped with a Duplex Filter, check that the combined RX/TX Antenna has been installed.

Check that the RX and TX Antenna Cables from the antennas are routed to the BRU3. If the BRU3 is equipped with a duplex filter, check that the combined RX/TX antenna cable is routed to the BRU3.

Check that the BRU3 Ground Cable has been connected to the Main Site Station Ground and that the cable is routed to the BRU3.

Check that the required 120/230V AC Power Supply Cable has been connected to the Site Power Connection Box.

Check that the Site Network Connection has been routed to the BRU3. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1531-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2001-09-28 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 9 (48) 4 Ground Connection 1. Mount the Cable Lug on the Copper Grounding Cable using a Crimp Tool

(Pos 1). 2. 3. Slide the Spring Washer (Pos 3), the Plain Washer (Pos 4) and the Cable Lug (Pos 5) on to the M8x10mm Grounding Bolt (Pos 2). Insert the Grounding Bolt (Pos 2) into one of the two tapped ground holes in the Base Plate and tighten it. Figure 2 Connection of ground to the BRU3. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1531-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2001-09-28 10 (48) BRU3 MANUAL 5 Installation of the BRU3 5.1 Installation of the BRU3 on a Wall 1. Unpack the BRU3 equipment. Tick off all parts against the delivery note and the module C manual. Please report missing or damaged parts to the shipper. 2. Mark the positions of four holes using the Drill Template. Drill the four 80 mm deep holes in the Wall with an 18 mm concrete drill (Pos 1). Figure 3 Installation of the base plate on a wall. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1531-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2001-09-28 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 11 (48) 3. Clean the Wall and the holes from drill dust. 4. Mount the four Loose Bolt Expanders of the type HILTI HDE M10 or the equivalent, in the holes (Figure 2, Pos 2). 5. 6. Install the Base Plate on the Wall and tighten the four M10x70 mm bolts

(or the equivalent) to the Loose Bolt Expanders (Figure 3, Pos 3). Tighten the two M10x20 mm hook-up bolts into the BRU3 with a depth of 10 mm (Figure 4, Pos 4). Figure 4 Installation of the two BRU3 hook up bolts. 7. Lift the BRU3. Put the two hook-up bolts into the key hole openings in the Base Plate and let the BRU3 slide down into position (Pos 5). 8. Tighten the two hook up bolts to the BRU3. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1531-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2001-09-28 12 (48) BRU3 MANUAL Figure 5 Installation of BRU3 on the base plate (mounted on a wall). BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1531-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2001-09-28 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 13 (48) 5.2 Installation of the BRU3 on a Pole 5.2.1 Installation on a Vertical Pole 1. Unpack the BRU3 equipment. Tick off all parts against the delivery note and the module C manual. Please report missing or damaged parts to the shipper. 2. 3. Pass the four M10x200 mm bolts through the Base Plate and the two Braces, the Pole positioned between the Braces (Pos 1). Put the eight M10 nuts on to the bolts (two nuts for each bolt) and tighten them (Pos 2). Figure 6 Installation of the base plate and the two braces on a vertical pole. 4. Tighten the two M10x20 mm hook-up bolts into the BRU3 with a depth of 10 mm (Pos 3). BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1531-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2001-09-28 14 (48) BRU3 MANUAL 5. 6. 7. Lift the BRU3. Put the two hook-up bolts into the key hole openings in the Base Plate and let the BRU3 slide down into position (Pos 4). Tighten the two hook up bolts to the BRU3. To protect the BRU3 from being removed from the site, stave the four M10x200 mm bolt ends up with a hammer to lock the nuts to the bolts

(Pos 5). Figure 7 Installation of the BRU3 on a vertical pole. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1531-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2001-09-28 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 15 (48) Figure 8 The BRU3 installed on a vertical pole. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1531-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2001-09-28 16 (48) BRU3 MANUAL 5.2.2 Installation on a Horizontal Pole 1. Unpack the BRU3 equipment. Tick off all parts against the delivery note and the module C manual. Please report missing or damaged parts to the shipper. 2. 3. 4. 5. Pass the two M10x25 mm bolts (Pos 1) through the Base Plate, the first Brace and put on the washers (Pos 2). Put the two M10 nuts (Pos 3) on to the bolts and tighten them. Pass the four M10x200 mm bolts (Pos 4) through the Base Plate and the Braces, the Pole positioned between the Braces. Put the eight M10 nuts (Pos 5) on to the bolts (two nuts for each bolt) and tighten them. Figure 9 Installation of the base plate and the two braces on a horizontal plate. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1531-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2001-09-28 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 17 (48) 6. 7. 8. 9. Screw the two M10x20 mm hook up bolts into the BRU3 with a depth of 10 mm (Pos 6). Lift the BRU3. Put the two hook-up bolts into the key hole openings in the Base Plate (Pos 7) and let the BRU3 slide down into position. Tighten the two hook up bolts to the BRU3. To protect the BRU3 from being removed from the site, stave the four M10x200 mm bolt ends up with a hammer to lock the nuts to the bolts

(Pos 8). Figure 10 Installation of BRU3 on a horizontal pole. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1531-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2001-09-28 18 (48) BRU3 MANUAL Figure 11 The BRU3 installed on a horizontal pole. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1531-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2001-09-28 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 19 (48) 6 Front Cover Installation Safety Instructions Please refer to the Safety Instructions in the BRU3 - General module. Note!

The BRU3 front cover knock-outs have to be broken differently depending on whether the BRU3 is intended for outdoor or indoor installation (Figure 12 or Figure 13). Figure 12 Knock-outs for the BRU3 outdoor installation. Figure 13 Knock-outs for the BRU3 indoor installation. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1531-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2001-09-28 20 (48) BRU3 MANUAL 7 Connecting the Antenna 7.1 Connection of Separate RX and TX Antenna 1. Open the BRU3. 2. Break off knock-outs 1 and 2 in the BRU3 front cover (Figure 12 or Figure 13). 3. Mount and tighten two large Cable Bushings to the Cable Bushing Nuts in knock-outs 1 and 2. 4. Pass the open end of the RX Antenna Cable through knock-out 1. Pass the open end of the TX Antenna Cable through knock-out 2. Note!

Pass both Antenna Cables from the outside of the BRU3 and inwards. 5. Mount the Antenna Connectors to the RX and TX Antenna Cables (Figure 16). 6. 7. 8. 9. Connect the RX Antenna to the BRU3 connector RX (Figure 14, Pos 1) Connect the TX Antenna to the BRU3 connector TX (Figure 14, Pos 2). Tighten the Cable Bushings to the RX and TX Antenna Cables. Connect the open ends of the RX and TX Antenna Cables to the RX and TX Antennas according to the Site Requirements section in the BRU3 -

General module. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1531-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2001-09-28 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 21 (48) Figure 14 Connection of RX antenna (Pos 1) and TX antenna (Pos 2). BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1531-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2001-09-28 22 (48) BRU3 MANUAL 7.2 Connecting the Combined RX/TX Antenna 1. Open the BRU3. 2. Break off the knock-out 2 in the BRU3 front cover (Figure 12 or Figure 13). 3. Mount and tighten a small Cable Bushing to the Cable Bushing Nut in knock-out 2. 4. Pass the open end of the combined RX/TX Antenna Cable through knock-

out 2. Note!

Pass the Antenna Cable from the outside of the BRU3 and inwards. 5. Mount the Antenna Connector to the combined RX/TX Antenna Cable

(Figure 16). 6. 7. 8. Connect the combined RX/TX Antenna to the BRU3 connector TX

(Figure 15, Pos 2). Tighten the Cable Bushing to the combined RX/TX Antenna Cable. Connect the open end of the combined RX/TX Antenna Cable to the RX/

TX Antenna according to the Site Requirements section in the BRU3 -

General module. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1531-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2001-09-28 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 23 (48) Figure 15 Connection of Combined RX/TX antenna (Pos 2). BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1531-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2001-09-28 24 (48) 7.3 BRU3 MANUAL Connecting the Antenna Connector to the Antenna Cable Figure 16 Connecting the antenna connector (Suhner 11 TNC-50-7-2c to the antenna Cable RG 214/U-60 + Sleeve Suhner 73Z-0-0-180), using the Suhner 76 Z-0-0-115 crimp tool kit. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Slide the ferrule (Pos 1) on to the Antenna Cable. Prepare the Antenna Cable according to the following measurements:

A=16.5 mm, B=6.5 mm, C=5.5 mm. Caution! Do not damage the braid and inner conductor!

Push the contact (Pos 2) over the inner conductor of the Antenna Cable to abut on cable dielectric, and crimp. Splay out the braid. Insert the centre contact (Pos 2) into the connector body (Pos 3) as far as stop. Ensure that the braid lies above the crimp neck. Slide the ferrule (Pos 1) over the braid and crimp as close to the connector body (Pos 3) as possible. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1531-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2001-09-28 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 25 (48) 8 Connecting Network 8.1 General There are three Network Connection alternatives for connecting the BRU3 to the Mobitex Area Exchange (MOX). One of the following shall be used:

Telephone Line Connection

RS232C Line Connection

RS422B Line Connection Use the SW2 dip switch on the FE Computer Board (FCB), (Figure 17 and Figure 18) to set the connection alternative. Figure 17 Location of SW2 dip switch on the FE computer board (FCB). BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1531-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2001-09-28 26 (48) BRU3 MANUAL 8.2 Connecting the Telephone Line 1. Open the BRU3. 2. 3. Locate the SW2 dip switch on the FE Computer Board (FCB) in the BRU3

(Figure 17). Set the SW2 dip switch in the following positions: SW2:1-Open, SW2:2-

Open, SW2:3-Open, SW2:4-Open (Figure 18). Figure 18 SW2 dip switch set-up on the FCB for connecting the telephone line. 4. Break off the knock-out 4 in the BRU3 front cover (Figure 12 or Figure 12). 5. Mount and tighten the small Cable Bushing to the Cable Bushing Nut in knock-out 4. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1531-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2001-09-28 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 27 (48) 6. Pass the open end of the FE Telephone Line Connection Cable, TSRA 905 45, through the Cable Bushing in the knock-out 4 in the BRU3. Note!

Pass the FE Telephone Line Connection Cable from the inside of the BRU3 and outwards. 7. Connect the FE Telephone Line Connection Cable to the BRU3 connector P3 - TELEPHONE (Pos 4). 8. Tighten the Cable Bushing to the FE Telephone Line Connection Cable. Figure 19 Connection of FE telephone line connection cable, TSRA 905 45

(Pos 4). 9. Connect the open end of the FE Telephone Line Connection Cable (Figure 20) to the Site Network Connection Box according to the Site Requirements section in the BRU3 - General module. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1531-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2001-09-28 28 (48) BRU3 MANUAL Figure 20 The FE telephone line connection cable, TSRA 905 45. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1531-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2001-09-28 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 29 (48) 8.3 Connecting the RS232C Line 1. Open the BRU3. 2. 3. Locate the SW2 dip switch on FE Computer Board (FCB) in the BRU3

(Figure 17). Set the SW2 dip switch in the following positions: SW2:1-Open, SW2:2-

Open, SW2:3-Closed, SW2:4-Open (Figure 21). Figure 21 SW2 dip switch set-up on the FCB for the modem RS232C connection. 4. Break off the knock-out 5 in the BRU3 front cover (Figure 12 or Figure 13). 5. Mount the small Cable Bushing to the Cable Bushing Nut in the knock-out 5. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1531-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2001-09-28 30 (48) BRU3 MANUAL 6. Pass the open end of the FE Modem Connection Cable RS232, TSRA 904 63 through the Cable Bushing in the knock-out 5 in the BRU3. Note!

Pass the FE Modem Connection Cable RS232 from the inside of the BRU3 and outwards. 7. 8. 9. Connect the FE Modem Connection Cable RS232 to the BRU3 connector P4 - RS232 (Pos 6). Tighten the Cable Bushing to the FE Modem Connection Cable RS232. Connect the open end of the FE Modem Connection Cable RS232 to the Site Network Connection Box according to the Site Requirements section in the BRU3 - General module. Figure 22 Connecting the FE modem connection cable RS232, TSRA 904 63, (Pos 6). BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1531-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2001-09-28 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 31 (48) Figure 23 The FE modem connection cable RS232, TSRA 904 63, (Pos 6). BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1531-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2001-09-28 32 (48) BRU3 MANUAL 8.4 Connecting the RS422B Line 1. Open the BRU3. 2. 3. Locate the SW2 dip switch on FE Computer Board (FCB) in the BRU3

(Figure 17). Set the SW2 dip switch in the following positions: SW2:1-Closed, SW2:2-

Open, SW2:3-Closed, SW2:4-Open (Figure 24). Figure 24 SWP dip switch set-up on FCB for modem connection RS422B. 4. Break off the knock-out 5 in the BRU3 front cover (Figure 12 or Figure 13). BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1531-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2001-09-28 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 33 (48) 5. Pass the open end of the FE Modem Connection Cable RS422 (TSRA 904 64) through the Cable Bushing in knock-out 5 in the BRU3. Note!

Pass the FE Modem Connection Cable RS422 from the inside of the BRU3 and outwards. 6. Connect the FE Modem Connection Cable RS422 to the BRU3 connector P5 - RS422 (Pos 5). 7. Tighten the Cable Bushing to the FE Modem Connection Cable RS422. Figure 25 Connection of the FE modem connection cable RS422, TSRA 90464, (Pos 5). 8. Connect the open end of the FE Modem Connection Cable RS422 (Figure 26) to the Site Network Connection Box according to the Site Requirements section in the BRU3 - General module. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1531-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2001-09-28 34 (48) BRU3 MANUAL Figure 26 The FE modem connection cable RS422, TSRA 904 64. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1531-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2001-09-28 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 35 (48) 9 Connecting the Alarm It is possible to connect two external alarms to the BRU3. One of the alarm loops (AL2+/AL2-) is by default strapped for the open case alarm but it can be reconnected with an external alarm. The connecting procedure depends on whether the current loop is supplied with power from the BRU3 or from an external Power Supply. Note!

Alarm parameters have to be set in CONFIG before Alarm Connection. The following Alarm Connection data are given:

Internal Resistance = 16.4 kohm

Type Current = 0.5 mA

Minimum Current = 0.1 mA

Voltage = 12 V 1. Open the BRU3. 2. Break off knock-out 6 in the BRU3 front cover (Figure 12 or Figure 13). 3. Mount the small Cable Bushing to the Cable Bushing Nut in the knock-out 6. 4. 5. Pass the open end of FE Alarm Cable, TSRA 905 44, through the Cable Bushing in knock-out 6 in the BRU3, from the inside out. Connect the FE Alarm Cable connector to the BRU3 connector P2 -

ALARM (Figure 27, Pos 7). 6. Tighten the Cable Bushing to the FE Alarm Cable. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1531-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2001-09-28

36 (48) BRU3 MANUAL Figure 27 Connecting the FE alarm cable, TSRA 905 44 to BRU3 (Pos 7). BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1531-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2001-09-28 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 37 (48) Figure 28 FE alarm cable, TSRA 905 44. 7. Connect the external alarm according to the following two alternatives:

Alternative 1:

Connection of external alarm with current loop powered by the Internal Power Supply (Figure 29).

- Strap connector pins P2:1 and P2:2 on the FE Connection Board (FNB) in the open end of the FE Alarm Cable TSRA 905 44.

- Connect the external alarm outer current loop to connector pins P2:3 and P2:4 on the FE Connection Board (FNB) in the open end of the FE Alarm Cable TSRA 905 44. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1531-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2001-09-28 38 (48) BRU3 MANUAL Figure 29 External alarm powered by the BRU3. Alternative 2:

Connection of external alarm with current loop powered by External Power Supply (Figure 30).

- Connect the external outer current loop to connector pins P2:2 (+) and P2:3 (-

) on the FE Connection Board (FNB) in the open end of the FE Alarm Cable TSRA 905 44. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1531-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2001-09-28 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 39 (48) Figure 30 External alarm powered by an external power supply. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1531-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2001-09-28 40 (48) BRU3 MANUAL 10 Connecting Power 10.1 Outdoor Installation Caution!

38xx and 39xx: Double-pole/Line fusing. 34xx: Single-pole/Line fusing. 1. For safety reasons, disconnect the Main Fuses in the Site Power and check that the Power Supply Cable is not live. 2. Open the BRU3. 3. Set the MAINS SWITCH on the FE Power Supply Unit (FPU) to position 0 (OFF). 4. Break knock-out 3 in the BRU3 front cover (Figure 12). 5. Disconnect the Power Connector from the FE Power Connection Kit

(Figure 31 or Figure 32). 6. 7. 8. Pass the Power Supply Cable through the knock-outs in the front cover and connect the Cable Bushing on the FE Power Connection Kit to the Cable Bushing Nut in knock-out 3. Make sure that the rubber washer is placed inside the BRU3. Connect the Power Connector to the power Cable, (Figure 31 or Figure 32). Connect the Power Connector to the MAINS INLET on the FPU

(Figure 35). 9. Mount the FE Power Connection Box on the wall/pole. 10. Remove the front cover of the FE Power Connection Box and connect the AC cable to the connector in the box Figure 32 or Figure 33. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1531-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2001-09-28 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 41 (48) Make sure that the cables are connected as follows:

38xx and 39xx:

Pos. Cable Colour PE Protection Ground Green or Green/Yellow N L1 Neutral Line White Black 34xx:

Pos. Cable Colour PE N L1 Protection Ground Green/Yellow Neutral Line Blue Brown Figure 31 The connector on the FE power supply cable. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1531-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2001-09-28 42 (48) BRU3 MANUAL 11. Replace the front cover on the FE Power Connection Box. 12. Connect the Main Fuses in the Site Power. Figure 32 FE power connection kit - NTM 201 1126/1. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1531-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2001-09-28 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 43 (48) Figure 33 The FE power connection kit - NTM 201 1127/1. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1531-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2001-09-28 44 (48) BRU3 MANUAL 10.2 Indoor Installation Caution!

38xx and 39xx: Double-pole/Line fusing. 34xx: Single-pole/Line fusing. 1. For safety reasons, disconnect the Main Fuses in the Site Power and check that the Power Supply Cable is not live. 2. Open the BRU3. 3. 4. 5. 6. Set the MAINS SWITCH on the FE Power Supply Unit (FPU) to position 0 (OFF). Break knock-out 3 in the BRU3 front cover (Figure 13). Connect the Cable Bushing on the FE Power Connection Kit to the Cable Bushing Nut in knock-out 3. Connect the Power Connector to the MAINS INLET on the FPU

(Figure 35). 7. Mount the FE Power Connection Box on the wall/pole. 8. Remove the front cover from the FE Power Connection Box and connect the AC cable to the connector in the box (Figure 32 or Figure 33). Make sure that the cables are connected as follows:

38xx and 39xx:

Pos. Cable Colour PE Protection Ground Green or Green/Yellow N L1 Neutral Line White Black BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1531-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2001-09-28 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 45 (48) 34xx:

Pos. Cable Colour PE N L1 Protection Ground Green/Yellow Neutral Line Blue Brown Figure 34 The connector on the FE power supply cable. 9. Replace the front cover on the FE Power Connection Box. 10. Connect the Main Fuses in the AC Site Power. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1531-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2001-09-28 46 (48) BRU3 MANUAL Figure 35 Connection of the FE power connection kit to the MAINS INLET on the FPU in the BRU3. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1531-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2001-09-28 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 47 (48) 11 Before Leaving the Site When the Installation Procedure has been completed, ensure that the installed BRU3 fulfils the following requirements before starting the HW and SW Commissioning Procedures. 1. 2. 3. Check that the MAINS SWITCH on the FE Power Supply Unit (FPU) is set in position 0 (OFF). Check that the BATTERY SWITCH on the FE Power Supply Unit

(FPU) is set to position 0 (OFF). Lock the BRU3 with the two padlocks (Figure 36, Pos 1). The BRU3 should always be kept locked for safety reasons. Figure 36 Installation of padlocks on the BRU3 on a vertical pole. BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1531-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2001-09-28 48 (48) BRU3 MANUAL BRU3 MANUAL, Doc.no: 1531-ANNA 805 08 Uen, Rev H, 2001-09-28